{"title":"Document templates","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis is Mallbutiken's broad catalogue of legal and administrative document templates for individuals, companies and organisations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare the options below. The product title shows the document type; open the product for full contents, formats and intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"kontrollbalansrakning-mall-utan-revisor","title":"Control Balance Sheet without Auditor – Excel Template + English Version + Guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eControl Balance Sheet for Swedish limited companies without an appointed auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete digital template package featuring Swedish and English Excel templates as well as detailed user guides. The workbook helps the board of directors structure recorded values, permitted control balance sheet (KBR) adjustments, capital adequacy assessments, documentation, and signatures in accordance with Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on Chapter 25 of the Swedish Companies Act, applicable annual accounts regulations, and generally accepted accounting principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eComplete KBR workbook in XLSX.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version for use under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guidance in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed English guide in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDigital delivery\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eAll files are delivered combined in a ZIP package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen should a control balance sheet be prepared?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board must \u003cstrong\u003eimmediately\u003c\/strong\u003e prepare a control balance sheet when there is \u003cstrong\u003ereason to assume\u003c\/strong\u003e that the company's equity, calculated according to the control balance sheet rules, is less than half of the registered share capital. The obligation may therefore arise before the capital deficiency is definitively established.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA control balance sheet must also be prepared when an attempt to levy execution shows that the company lacks sufficient assets to fully pay the debt under execution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the new Excel template helps you with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate fields for recorded values and KBR adjustments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatic calculation of KBR values,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatic balance check,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against half of the registered share capital for the first assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against the full registered share capital before the second meeting of creditors,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate specification of each KBR adjustment and its supporting documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehandling of equity portions and deferred tax liabilities for untaxed reserves,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboard signature page,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esource sheet with relevant official legal sources.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKBR adjustments – not an ordinary balance sheet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA control balance sheet is based on the company's regular accounts, but specific adjustments can be made within the framework of the Swedish Companies Act. Among other things, assets may, under certain conditions, be recorded at higher values, provisions and liabilities at lower values, assets valued at net selling price, and untaxed reserves divided between equity and deferred tax liability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore has a separate sheet to document \u003cstrong\u003ewhich item is being adjusted, the amount, the valuation basis, the justification, and supporting evidence\u003c\/strong\u003e. The formulas serve as a working aid – the board is responsible for ensuring that every valuation is correct and consistent with generally accepted accounting principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFirst and second meeting of creditors\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the control balance sheet shows that equity is less than half of the registered share capital, the board must convene the first meeting of creditors as soon as possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the capital is not fully restored and the meeting does not decide on liquidation, the control balance sheet process continues. A second meeting of creditors should normally be held within eight months. Prior to the second meeting of creditors, full restoration to at least the registered share capital is required for the company to be able to exit the control balance sheet process without liquidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding the \"without auditor\" product\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis version is intended for Swedish limited companies that \u003cstrong\u003edo not have an appointed auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e. If the company has an auditor, the auditor must review the control balance sheet. The product should not be used as a means to circumvent a required auditor review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish and English Excel templates have equivalent structures. The English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – it is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign corporate law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide walks you through step-by-step when the board must act, how to fill in each sheet of the workbook, how to document KBR adjustments, the meetings of creditors, full restoration of share capital, personal payment liability, a practical checklist, and frequently asked questions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this template for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esmaller and owner-managed Swedish limited companies without an appointed auditor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboards that need to investigate suspected capital deficiency,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness owners and accounting consultants who want a structured working document,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompanies that need to document KBR adjustments and capital tests clearly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download in ZIP format. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/kontrollbalansrakning-information-och-vagledning\/kontrollbalansrakning-vardering-av-poster\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRead more about the valuation of items in a control balance sheet →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need an auditor to use the template?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product is developed for companies without an appointed auditor. If the company has an auditor, they must review the control balance sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Excel template automatically determine if the company must be liquidated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The capital test is a control and calculation aid. The board must personally ensure that accounting, valuations, deadlines, and other legal requirements are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the English version in a Swedish company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The English version is the same type of working material but in English, and is explicitly adapted to Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for the second meeting of creditors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. On the START sheet, you can select the control stage, and the capital test will then switch from half of the share capital to a requirement for at least the full registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a practical document and calculation aid and does not replace individual legal or accounting advice. In cases of complex valuations, unclear timing of capital deficiency, or a risk of missed deadlines, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47972473012566,"sku":"Kontrollbalansräkning-utan-revisor","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/kontrollbalansrakning-utan-revisor-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791141843"},{"product_id":"kontrollbalansrakning-mall-med-revisor","title":"Controlling balance sheet with auditor – Excel template + Swedish\/English guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eControl Balance Sheet for Swedish limited company with an appointed auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete digital template package featuring Swedish and English Excel templates, automatic capital assessment, specific auditor documentation, and detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on Chapter 25 of the Swedish Companies Act, the Annual Accounts Act, and the Swedish Accounting Standards Board's current guidance on control balance sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eComplete workbook for control balance sheet with auditor workflow.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version for use in accordance with Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed step-by-step guide in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed English guide in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDigital delivery\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eAll new files are delivered together in a ZIP package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: Auditor's report not included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company has an appointed auditor, the control balance sheet must be audited by the \u003cstrong\u003ecompany's auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e. The auditor's report must be prepared following the actual audit and therefore cannot be replaced by a general template. Instead, the package contains a specific worksheet for gathering audit documentation, dates, attachments, and the status of the auditor's report.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen must a control balance sheet be prepared?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board of directors must \u003cstrong\u003eimmediately\u003c\/strong\u003e prepare a control balance sheet when there is \u003cstrong\u003ereason to assume\u003c\/strong\u003e that the company's equity, calculated according to control balance sheet regulations, is less than half of the registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe obligation also applies if an attachment attempt shows that the company lacks assets to fully pay the attachment claim. If the company has an auditor, the control balance sheet must subsequently be audited by them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the Excel template helps you with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate columns for book values, control balance sheet adjustments, and control balance sheet values,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatic balance control,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against half the registered share capital for the first assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against the full registered share capital before the second general meeting,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate specification of control balance sheet adjustments and associated valuation documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebreakdown of untaxed reserves into equity and deferred tax,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboard signature page,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific \u003cstrong\u003eAUDITOR sheet\u003c\/strong\u003e with a checklist of documents that may need to be provided to the auditor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003echeckpoints to ensure the auditor's report is available before the general meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe auditor workflow is built into the workbook\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOn the specific auditor sheet, the company can document who the auditor is, when the control balance sheet was submitted for audit, the date of the auditor's report, and whether the report is attached. It also includes a checklist for items such as the general ledger, balance reconciliations, valuation documentation, specifications of control balance sheet adjustments, and board minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe sheet is solely a work and documentation aid. The auditor decides for themselves which audit measures are required and how the separate report is to be formulated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eControl balance sheet adjustments and valuation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe control balance sheet is based on the company's ordinary accounts, but Section 25(14) of the Companies Act allows for specific adjustments. Assets may, under certain conditions, be recorded at a higher value, provisions and liabilities at a lower value, assets can be reported at net realizable value, and untaxed reserves must be divided between equity and deferred tax liability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEvery adjustment must be justified and documented. In this version, this is particularly important since the documentation must be available for review by the company's auditor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFirst general meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the audited control balance sheet shows that equity is less than half of the registered share capital, the board must call a first general meeting as soon as possible. \u003cstrong\u003eBoth the control balance sheet and the auditor's report must be presented at the meeting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecond general meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the capital is not fully restored and the first general meeting does not decide on liquidation, a second general meeting must normally be held within eight months. Before that meeting, the board must prepare a new control balance sheet and have the company's auditor examine it. For the control balance sheet process to be concluded without liquidation, the control balance sheet must show that equity amounts to at least the registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English Excel template and user guide are language versions of documents designed for \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. They are not intended for use as British, American, or other foreign corporate law documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this package for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish limited companies with an appointed auditor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboards of directors needing to investigate suspected capital deficiency,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompanies wanting to gather control balance sheet and auditor documentation in a structured way,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaccounting consultants preparing documentation for an auditor's review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/kontrollbalansrakning-information-och-vagledning\/kontrollbalansrakning-vardering-av-poster\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRead more about the valuation of items in a control balance sheet →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a finished auditor's report included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The auditor's report must be prepared by the company's auditor after the actual audit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould the auditor sign the control balance sheet itself?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe control balance sheet must be signed by the board of directors. The auditor provides their report separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the control balance sheet is changed after the auditor's review?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA significantly changed version should be submitted to the auditor again for assessment of whether a new or supplementary audit is needed before the document is used in the control balance sheet process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for the second general meeting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The control step can be selected in the workbook, and the capital test is then adjusted to the requirement for full registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a practical documentation and calculation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting, or audit advice. The board is responsible for the control balance sheet, and the auditor is responsible for their independent audit and report.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47973303189846,"sku":"07350139912402","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/kontrollbalansrakning-med-revisor-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791143632"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-varning-till-anstalld-mall","title":"Written warning \/ formal reprimand for employee – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten warning \/ reprimand to employee\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete employment law template package for Swedish employers, including Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and a detailed user guide. The template is designed to help the employer document a specific deficiency, clarify what needs to change, and create a structured follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), relevant work environment and rehabilitation regulations, Labour Court practice, and applicable collective agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for written warning\/reprimand.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance for the employer.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for international HR environments in Sweden.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA warning is not the same as a disciplinary measure or termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard written LAS warning\/reprimand is primarily used to document misconduct or deficiencies, clarify the employer's requirements, and give the employee the opportunity to rectify the situation. The document is \u003cstrong\u003enot a notice of termination in itself\u003c\/strong\u003e and should not be described as a disciplinary measure unless permitted by a collective agreement or other specific regulation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the new template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployer, employee, position, and applicable collective agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe type of work-related deficiency in question,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate, location, and exactly what occurred,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich obligation, instruction, or policy is affected,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious discussions, reprimands, and support measures,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econcrete requirements for rectification and follow-up dates,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esupport, training, workplace adaptation, rehabilitation, or reassignment issues,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehandover, signature, and attachments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear warning regarding continued misconduct\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLabour Court practice shows that in many cases, it is important that the employee clearly understands that the employer views the deficiency seriously and, when the situation could escalate toward termination, that the employment may be in jeopardy. The template therefore contains a specific legal clarification that avoids claiming that a future termination is already decided or automatically valid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete facts instead of general criticism\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is built to describe \u003cstrong\u003econcrete events and verifiable deficiencies\u003c\/strong\u003e – not vague formulations such as \"bad attitude\" or \"lack of professionalism\" without connection to the tasks. The employer can state the date, context, instruction\/policy, supporting documentation, and what is actually expected moving forward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocumenting the employee's version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA separate section is intended for the employee's explanation. This creates better documentation and reduces the risk of an employment law assessment being based on a one-sided or incomplete account of events.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSupport, rehabilitation, and workplace adaptation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the deficiency may be related to illness, reduced work capacity, or disability, the employer needs to assess obligations regarding rehabilitation and workplace adaptation. The template therefore includes a specific checklist for support measures and clearly notes that a warning must not replace such investigation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf termination becomes relevant later\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA written warning does not replace the formal rules that apply before termination or dismissal. The employer then needs to assess, among other things, objective grounds, reassignment, time limits, notification to the employee, and – where applicable – notice to the employee's trade union.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSignature without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document contains a specific receipt clause: the employee's signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not imply that the employee agrees with the employer's description or assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is particularly useful in Swedish companies with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign employment law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains when the template is appropriate, when the employer should wait, how to fill in each section, how a clear LAS warning should be formulated, the significance of less intrusive measures, rehabilitation and workplace adaptation, the reassignment issue, time limits, signature, and practical documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is the package for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployers and HR functions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emanagers with personnel responsibility,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esmall and medium-sized enterprises that need structured personnel documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish businesses with both Swedish and English as working languages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of documents:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 files.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust a warning always be in writing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, but written documentation makes it significantly easier to demonstrate what has been communicated, when it occurred, and what requirements the employer has set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many warnings must an employee receive before termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general rule regarding a specific number of warnings. The assessment depends on how serious the misconduct is, what the employee has understood, what measures the employer has taken, and other circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the employee obligated to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. If the employee refuses to sign, the employer can document that the document was handed over nonetheless. The template has a dedicated space for this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used as a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A termination or dismissal procedure is covered by specific legal requirements and separate documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. In the event of risk of termination, dismissal, discrimination, rehabilitation disputes, or other more extensive disputes, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48048377135446,"sku":"07350139912419","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-varning-erinran-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791144621"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-generell","title":"Written warning – general template Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – general template for employers\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF versions, including a detailed user guide. The package is designed for situations where the employer needs to document a specific work-related deficiency, clarify what must be corrected, and follow up on the situation in an objective and structured manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), relevant case law from the Labour Court, rules on workplace accommodation, and applicable parts of collective agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – Swedish\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Word template + print-friendly PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA notice is not automatically a disciplinary measure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard employment law notice is primarily used to document a deficiency, clarify the employer's requirements, and give the employee an opportunity to rectify the situation. The document is \u003cstrong\u003enot in itself a notice of termination\u003c\/strong\u003e and should not be described as a disciplinary measure unless permitted by a collective agreement or other specific regulations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA general template for many types of personnel matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is intended for situations where a more specialized notice is not required. It can, for example, be adapted for deficiencies in work performance, repeated failure to follow instructions, conduct issues, collaboration problems, or other work-related obligations – provided that the employer describes \u003cstrong\u003econcrete events\u003c\/strong\u003e and makes an individual assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployer, employee, position, and any collective agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebackground and purpose of the notice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate, time, location, and specific event or deficiency,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich work task, instruction, policy, or obligation is involved,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esupporting evidence and previous dialogue,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econcrete requirements for correction, timeframe, and follow-up,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esupport, workplace accommodation, rehabilitation, and any potential redeployment issues,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edelivery, receipt, and documentation if the employee refuses to sign.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete facts instead of vague judgments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is designed to describe what actually happened. Phrases such as \"bad attitude\" or \"lack of professionalism\" should not stand alone, but should be linked to specific actions, work tasks, or instructions. This creates clearer communication and better documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's version has its own section\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee should be given the opportunity to respond to the employer's statements. Therefore, there is a specific section for explanations, objections, and relevant circumstances. If new information comes to light, the employer may need to investigate the matter further before a final assessment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRequirements for correction and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA notice should not only describe what went wrong. It should also clarify \u003cstrong\u003ewhat needs to change, when it must be corrected, and how it will be followed up\u003c\/strong\u003e. The template therefore includes a separate section for correction and follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen employment may be at risk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn many cases of misconduct, the Labour Court has emphasized the importance of the employer clearly stating that continued misconduct may affect the employment and giving the employee a genuine opportunity to correct the deficiencies. How clear such a statement needs to be depends on the situation and the seriousness of the misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWorkplace accommodation and rehabilitation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the problem may be related to illness or reduced work capacity, the employer must assess the need for workplace accommodation and rehabilitation. A notice must not be used as a substitute for such measures. The template therefore contains specific checklist questions regarding support, accommodation, and other less intrusive measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf termination is considered later\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA notice does not replace the formal rules that apply in the event of any future termination or dismissal. The employer will then need to make a separate assessment regarding objective grounds, redeployment, time limits, and notifications\/warnings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe signature in the template only confirms that the employee has received the document. It does not mean that the employee approves of the employer's description or assessment. If the employee chooses not to sign, there is a special field to document how and when the document was delivered anyway.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for Swedish organizations with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign labor law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide describes when a general notice is appropriate, when the employer should be cautious, how to document specific events, how to formulate requirements for correction, the significance of the employee's version, workplace accommodation and rehabilitation, what applies if the employment may later be at risk, as well as practical handling of receipts and archiving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a notice the same thing as a warning?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe terms are sometimes used interchangeably in working life. What matters is what the document actually communicates and how it is used. This product is designed as a general notice\/clarification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the employee have to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. If the employee refuses, the employer can document how and when the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used as a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate formal and time-related rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many notices are required before termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general rule regarding a specific number. The assessment depends on the circumstances, the seriousness of the deficiency, what measures the employer has taken, and what the employee has understood.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. For more intrusive employment law measures or complicated personnel matters, qualified advisors should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48055264280918,"sku":"7350139912426","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-generell-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791148424"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-sakerhetsovertradelser","title":"Written warning – security violations Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice for safety violations\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document a specific deviation from safety regulations, protective instructions, or safe work methods. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Work Environment Act, AFS 2023:1 on systematic work environment management, relevant rules on work equipment and personal protective equipment, as well as the Employment Protection Act (LAS) and Labor Court practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template specifically adapted for safety violations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA notice does not replace the work environment investigation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn the event of accidents, ill health, or serious near-misses, the employer must investigate the underlying causes and take measures to prevent the event from recurring. A safety violation must therefore not be handled solely as a personnel matter. The template contains specific checkpoints to distinguish \u003cstrong\u003eindividual behavior\u003c\/strong\u003e from deficiencies in instructions, training, equipment, staffing, or work organization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when an employee has deviated from a known and legitimate safety rule or work instruction and the employer needs to document the incident and clarify requirements for correction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efailure to use prescribed personal protective equipment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebypassing guards, interlocks, or safety functions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003euse of machinery, tools, or work equipment in violation of instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eintentional deviation from an established safe work method,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother documented violations that create a risk of ill health or accidents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's obligations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Work Environment Act stipulates that employees must participate in work environment management, follow provided regulations, use protective devices, and exercise the caution necessary to prevent ill health and accidents. At the same time, the employer must be able to demonstrate that relevant safety rules were clear, accessible, and possible to follow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEmployer responsibility is checked separately\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer must ensure that employees have sufficient knowledge of the work and its risks. For serious risks, there must be written instructions for safe work. The template therefore has specific fields to document:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich safety rule or instruction is affected,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhen and how it was communicated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eif the employee received an introduction or training,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eif understanding has been verified,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eif the right protective equipment and safe tools were available.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDirect safety assessment after the incident\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a checklist for whether the work needed to be stopped or secured, if equipment needed to be locked out, if safety representatives or other work environment functions were informed, if reporting to authorities needs to be evaluated, and if a separate incident investigation and risk assessment have been initiated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderlying causes – not just the question of blame\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Work Environment Authority's rules on systematic work environment management require that the employer investigates the causes of work-related accidents and serious near-misses. The investigation must be used to prevent new incidents. Therefore, the template contains control questions regarding, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunclear or outdated instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003elack of training or introduction,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etechnical faults or insufficient safeguards,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etime pressure, staffing, or organizational causes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eneed for changed risk assessment or work method.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePersonal protective equipment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the incident concerns personal protective equipment, the employer also needs to check that the correct equipment has been selected, provided, and maintained, and that the employee has received instruction on its use. Protective equipment must not be used as a substitute for measures that can eliminate or reduce the risk at the source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's version is documented\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee gets a separate section for their explanation. This can, for example, reveal if instructions were unclear, if equipment was not functioning, or if time pressure, staffing, or other work environment factors affected the situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRequirement for correction and safety measures\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template distinguishes between \u003cstrong\u003ewhat the employee must do\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003ewhat the employer needs to address\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is possible to document mandatory use of protective equipment, safe work methods, refresher training, supervision, as well as technical or organizational improvements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the violation is repeated\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRepeated or serious breaches of legitimate safety rules can in some cases have employment law consequences. In cases of misconduct, the Labor Court has attached importance to whether the employee clearly understood what was required and, when the situation has not been so serious that it was unnecessary, had the opportunity to correct themselves. A potential subsequent dismissal or termination must always be assessed separately according to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), collective agreements, and the circumstances in the individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt without acknowledgment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature on the document only confirms receipt. It does not mean that the employee approves the employer's description or assessment. If a signature is declined, there is specific space to document how and when the document was handed over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is intended for Swedish workplaces with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees. It is not designed for British, American, or other foreign labor law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the obligations of the employee and employer, how the incident should be documented, what should be handled in a separate work environment investigation, reporting to authorities in case of serious incidents, personal protective equipment, requirements for correction, follow-up, and how potential future employment law actions should be distinguished from the notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough to give a notice after a serious near-miss?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The employer must also investigate the causes, assess the risks, and implement the work environment measures that are necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used if an employee does not use protective equipment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the employer simultaneously checks that the right equipment was available, that the requirement was clear, and that the employee received the necessary information and instruction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the employee have to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The employer can document the handover even if the employee declines a signature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A potential termination or dismissal is covered by separate legal requirements and must be tried independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation support and does not replace the employer's systematic work environment management, a mandatory report to authorities, or individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48055315661142,"sku":"7350139912433","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-sakerhetsovertradelser-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791149242"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-dalig-attityd-eller-negativt-beteende","title":"Written warning – conduct \u0026 cooperation Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – behavior and cooperation\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document specific behaviors, cooperation issues, or recurring conflicts that affect work. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Discrimination Act, the Swedish Work Environment Authority's regulations on organizational and social work environment, and the whistleblower protection act’s prohibition against retaliation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for concrete behavioral and cooperation problems.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eAvoid the phrase “bad attitude” as the sole basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general label such as \u003cstrong\u003e“bad attitude”\u003c\/strong\u003e is too subjective. The new template is therefore built to document \u003cstrong\u003eobservable actions\u003c\/strong\u003e: what was actually said or done, which work-related obligation is affected, how the work was impacted, and what concrete change is expected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template appropriate?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when concrete behaviors affect workflow, cooperation, customer relations, quality, or the work environment, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring disrespectful or inappropriate conduct,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring disruptive conflicts with colleagues or management,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erefusal to follow legitimate and clear work instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaggressive or confrontational behavior that impacts work,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esystematic unwillingness to fulfill specific collaborative tasks included in the role.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe template separates behavior from personality\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer should not judge a person's character or general personality. The document therefore contains specific fields for dates, context, words or actions, actual impact, and relevant documentation. This reduces the risk of vague or arbitrary phrasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's version must be documented\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is provided with their own section for their explanation. If new information emerges – for example regarding unclear requirements, high workload, conflict, lack of management, or other work environment factors – the employer may need to investigate further before a final assessment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWork environment and victimization\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAFS 2023:2 requires the employer to prevent victimization and manage organizational and social work environment risks. If the behavior is linked to conflict, unhealthy workload, unclear roles, or other work environment conditions, the employer must also address that part. A written notice does not replace the responsibility for the work environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHarassment and discrimination require separate investigation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf an employee reports harassment or sexual harassment, the employer has a specific duty to investigate the circumstances and take reasonable measures to prevent further harassment. This written notice does not replace such an investigation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProtected criticism and whistleblowing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific checkpoint to avoid retaliation. It may not be used to punish an employee for protected whistleblowing, legitimate reporting of misconduct, or other protected rights. The employer should also check collective agreements and union rights before taking action.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear requirements for change\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of writing that the employee must “improve their attitude,” the template helps the employer specify:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich concrete behavior must cease,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat should be done instead,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat support the employer offers,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhen the improvement is to be followed up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIllness, disability, and work adaptation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the behavior may be related to illness, disability, or reduced work capacity, the employer needs to assess obligations regarding work adaptation and rehabilitation. A written notice must not be used as a substitute for such measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf employment may later be in jeopardy\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf continued misconduct could eventually affect employment, the employer must make a separate labor law assessment in accordance with the Employment Protection Act (LAS) and any applicable collective agreement. The template contains a carefully phrased clarification that can be used when it is truly relevant, without implying that a future termination has already been decided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgment without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature only confirms receipt. It does not imply that the employee accepts the employer's description or assessment. If a signature is refused, there is a separate field for how and when the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for Swedish companies with international managers, HR departments, or English-speaking employees. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign labor law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers fact-checking, concrete phrasing, work environment, harassment, discrimination, whistleblowing, work adaptation, corrective requirements, follow-up, and how any later termination should be kept legally separate from the written notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I write “bad attitude” in the notice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is better to describe concrete behaviors and how they affect the work. Vague personal judgments are harder to follow up and can create unnecessary legal risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for conflicts between colleagues?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if there are concrete work-related behaviors to document. At the same time, the employer needs to assess whether the conflict points to work environment problems that also need to be managed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the employee reports harassment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn that case, the employer may have a separate duty to investigate according to the Discrimination Act and\/or work environment regulations. The notice does not replace that process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination or dismissal is subject to specific requirements and must be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific labor law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48055370514774,"sku":"7350139912440","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-beteende-samarbete-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791151768"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-brist-pa-professionalism","title":"Written reprimand – professionalism \u0026 professional conduct Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten warning – professionalism and professional conduct\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document concrete deficiencies in professional conduct, customer service, communication, quality, documentation, or compliance with legitimate work routines. The package contains Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Discrimination Act, the Swedish Work Environment Authority's regulations on organizational and social work environment, the Whistleblowing Act, and relevant case law from the Labour Court.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for concrete deficiencies in professional conduct.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003e\"Lack of professionalism\" must be specified\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProfessionalism is not an independent legal category. The new template therefore helps the employer to describe \u003cstrong\u003ewhat actually happened\u003c\/strong\u003e, which legitimate role requirement or work instruction is involved, how the work was affected, and what concrete change is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when concrete actions conflict with clear work-related expectations, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring inappropriate treatment of customers or suppliers,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003elack of documentation despite clear requirements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring unprofessional or inappropriate communication in the professional role,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efailure to follow clear quality, confidentiality, or work routines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete deviations from legitimate requirements that are part of the work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate, time, location, and concrete incident,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich policy, instruction, role standard, or task is involved,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eactual impact on customer, quality, workflow, safety, or team,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious feedback, training, and guidance,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econcrete requirements for correction and what is expected instead,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's support and follow-up date.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear requirements instead of subjective judgments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePhrasings such as \"be more professional,\" \"bad attitude,\" or \"disloyal\" are too vague if they stand alone. The template is therefore designed to link the criticism to observable behaviors, clear role requirements, and actual impact on the business.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompetence, introduction, and support\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBefore a warning is used, the employer should verify that the requirements have been clear, legitimate, and possible to follow. If the problem is due to a lack of introduction, training, unclear roles, or insufficient resources, the employer may need to take support or competence measures instead of, or in parallel with, a warning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWork environment and victimization\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Work Environment Authority's regulations require the employer to prevent victimization and manage organizational and social work environment risks. Conflicts, workload, unclear roles, or lack of management may therefore need to be investigated separately. A warning does not replace the responsibility for the work environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHarassment and discrimination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the employee reports harassment or sexual harassment, the employer may have a special obligation to investigate what happened, take measures, and follow up. The template therefore contains a specific checkpoint to avoid confusing a personnel matter with a discrimination investigation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhistleblowing and protected rights\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA warning may not be used as retaliation against anyone covered by the Whistleblowing Act's protection or who is otherwise exercising a protected right. The employer should therefore check the background of the alleged deficiency before the action is documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf continued misconduct could affect employment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn cases of misconduct, the Labour Court has emphasized the importance of the employee normally understanding that the employer views the deficiency seriously and is given a real opportunity to correct themselves. If a future termination is later considered, it must be assessed separately according to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), including the rules on objective grounds and reassignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt without acknowledgment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not imply that the employee accepts the employer's description or legal assessment. If a signature is declined, there is a special field to document how the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish businesses with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees, and is not intended as a foreign employment law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide goes through step-by-step when the template is suitable, how facts should be documented, how clear requirements are formulated, what importance training and support can have, and how work environment, discrimination, whistleblowing, and any subsequent termination should be kept legally separate from the warning itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I write \"lack of professionalism\" as the only justification?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is better to describe concrete actions, which work-related standard applied, and what actual impact occurred.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for customer service?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the employer can describe concrete events and clear legitimate requirements for how the role should be performed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the problem is actually a lack of competence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThen the employer should assess the need for training, guidance, clearer instructions, or other support measures before the situation is treated solely as misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate formal and assessment rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a concrete labor law case.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059529134422,"sku":"7350139912464","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-professionalism-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791152918"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-fronvaro-forseningar","title":"Written warning – absence \u0026 lateness Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – absence and lateness\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive template package for Swedish employers who need to document recurring late arrivals, unauthorized absence, or failures in absence routines in an objective and structured manner. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Sick Pay Act, the Parental Leave Act, and relevant case law from the Labour Court regarding unauthorized absence and misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for absence and lateness.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNot all absence is misconduct\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is designed to distinguish \u003cstrong\u003eunauthorized absence and failures in absence routines\u003c\/strong\u003e from absence that may be protected or require different handling, such as illness, VAB (temporary parental benefit)\/parental leave, granted vacation, or rehabilitation needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template appropriate?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when there are concrete, documented deficiencies, such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring late arrival despite clear working hours,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eabsence without contact according to a clear absence routine,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eabsence after a leave request has been explicitly denied,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erepeated failures in reporting sickness where the problem is the routine – not the illness itself,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete deviations from clear and legitimate attendance or reporting requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete incidents and actual working time\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific table where the employer can document dates, planned work shifts, actual attendance or absence, and how the notification was made. This provides significantly better documentation than general statements that someone is “unreliable” or “often late.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChecks before employment law assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBefore a written notice is issued, the employer should verify whether the absence is related to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eillness or reduced work capacity,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAB, parental leave, or other statutory leave,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003egranted vacation or other agreed leave,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erehabilitation or the need for workplace adaptation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecollective agreement rules regarding working hours, absence, or disciplinary measures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIllness and medical certificates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSpecial rules apply to sickness absence. For sick pay, the employee must normally substantiate continued reduced work capacity with a medical certificate from the eighth calendar day of the sickness period. Under special circumstances, earlier certificates may be requested. Recurring sickness absence may also necessitate rehabilitation and workplace adaptation and should therefore not automatically be treated as misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAB and parental leave\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Parental Leave Act contains an explicit prohibition against detriment related to protected parental leave. The template therefore includes a specific checklist to avoid, for example, VAB or other statutory parental leave being incorrectly classified as unauthorized absence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocumenting the employee's explanation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is given a separate section for their version of events. It may emerge, for example, that a schedule was unclear, that sickness notification was made in a way other than the employer initially thought, or that there are medical or family-related circumstances that must be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear requirements for rectification and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of a vague request to “improve attendance,” the template helps the employer specify exactly what is required moving forward, such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003earriving on time for scheduled work shifts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereporting sickness before a specified time,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacting the correct manager or function,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esubmitting requested documentation according to applicable rules,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific date for follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf problems persist\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTermination by the employer must, according to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), be based on objective grounds. Unauthorized absence can be serious, and the Labour Court has in some cases accepted very severe measures in instances of serious unauthorized absence. However, the assessment is always individual and is influenced by factors such as the extent of the absence, the employee’s explanation, prior clear warnings, the issue of redeployment, and the employer’s own obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgement of receipt without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee’s signature only confirms receipt. It does not mean that the employee accepts the employer’s description or assessment. If the employee refuses to sign, there is specific space to document how and when the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish businesses with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees, and is not intended as a foreign labour law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide goes through, step by step, how absence should be classified, illness and medical certificates, VAB and parental leave, documentation, requirements for rectification, follow-up, and how a potential subsequent termination or dismissal should be kept legally separate from the notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an employer issue a written notice for late arrival?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if there are clear working hours and the concrete lateness can be documented. Recurring lateness should be assessed based on its extent, previous communication, and other circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan sickness absence be treated as unauthorized absence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot solely because the employee is sick. However, failures in a clear sickness notification routine may need to be handled separately, and sickness absence is covered by special rules regarding sick pay, certificates, and rehabilitation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for VAB?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template should not be used to punish legally protected VAB\/parental leave. Always verify the right to leave and the notification rules first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate legal requirements and must be assessed independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific employment law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059535556950,"sku":"7350139912471","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-franvaro-forseningar-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791154574"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-brott-mot-foretagets-policy","title":"Written warning – policy violation Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – policy violation\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document a specific breach of an internal policy, guideline, or workplace rule. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Co-determination Act (MBL), the Discrimination Act, the Whistleblowing Act, as well as relevant work environment regulations and collective agreements where applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for documenting policy violations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eAn internal policy is not automatically sufficient grounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is designed to verify \u003cstrong\u003eexactly which rule applied, which version of the policy was current, how the rule was communicated, and whether it is legitimate and work-related\u003c\/strong\u003e. An internal policy cannot override law, employment contracts, or collective agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template appropriate?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used for concrete deviations from clear workplace rules, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebreach of IT, information security, or access routines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eviolation of confidentiality or information handling policies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edeviation from a code of conduct or other clear work-related guidelines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efailure to comply with quality or documentation routines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete violations of legitimate and clearly communicated rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExact policy rule and current version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product contains specific fields for policy title, version date, and the exact rule or section. This reduces the risk of the employer referring to a general policy without being able to demonstrate which specific obligation the employee is alleged to have breached.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow did the employee become aware of the policy?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template helps the employer document whether the rule was communicated via onboarding, training, intranet, employee handbook, meeting, receipt, or previous reminder. The employee's actual opportunity to follow the policy should also be verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMBL and the introduction of policies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the employer is bound by a collective agreement, a significant change in operations or working and employment conditions may trigger a primary duty to negotiate under the Co-determination Act (MBL). Therefore, the template contains a specific checkpoint for how the policy in question was introduced or amended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProtected rights – special check\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn internal policy may not be used as grounds for retaliation or other prohibited treatment. The template therefore includes checkpoints for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprotected whistleblowing and reporting of malpractice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereported discrimination or participation in a discrimination investigation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunion activity and collective bargaining rights,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother statutory rights that cannot be set aside by internal policy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWork environment and safety must be handled separately\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the policy violation concerns safety, work environment, or incidents, the employer must also conduct the investigations and risk measures required by work environment regulations. A written notice does not replace that responsibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/skriftlig-erinran-sakerhetsovertradelser\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor purely safety-related violations, our special safety template is also available →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocumenting the employee's version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is provided with their own section for their explanation. It may turn out, for example, that the policy was unclear, an older version was used, training was missing, or there were practical obstacles to following the rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete requirements for correction and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of just writing that the employee must “follow company policy,” the template helps the employer formulate exactly what must stop, what must be done instead, what support or training will be provided, and when the situation is to be followed up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the violation is repeated\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA policy violation may in some cases have employment law consequences, but the assessment depends on factors such as the clarity of the rule, how it was communicated, the seriousness of the violation, the employee's explanation, and previous actions. If termination is later considered, it must be assessed separately in accordance with the Employment Protection Act (LAS) and any applicable collective agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgment without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not mean that the employee accepts the employer's description or legal assessment. If the signature is declined, there is specific space to document the delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version based on Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish organizations with international managers, HR departments, or English-speaking employees and is not intended as a foreign employment law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide walks you through the policy check, the MBL question, communication of rules, documentation of facts, protected rights, work environment, the employee's version, correction requirements, follow-up, and how any subsequent termination should be kept legally separate from the notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough for a policy to be on the intranet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot always. It is relevant whether the rule was clear, current, legitimate, and reasonably known to the employee. How the policy was communicated should therefore be documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a policy conflict with a collective agreement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn internal policy cannot be used to override a collective agreement or mandatory legal provisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for whistleblowing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt must not be used as retaliation for protected reporting. Always check whether the alleged policy violation is related to whistleblowing or other protected activity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate rules and must be assessed independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific labor law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059557839190,"sku":"7350139912488","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-policyovertradelse-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791155156"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-bristande-arbetsprestation","title":"Written warning – poor work performance Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten Warning – Poor Performance\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive employment law template package for Swedish employers who need to document concrete performance deficiencies, clarify reasonable requirements, and create a structured improvement and follow-up plan. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Discrimination Act, the Swedish Work Environment Authority’s regulations on workplace adaptation, and relevant case law from the Labor Court.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for concrete performance deficiencies and improvement plans.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrintable version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003ePoor performance must be substantiated\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePhrases such as \u003cstrong\u003e\"low performance,\"\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e\"inefficient,\"\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003e\"inadequate\"\u003c\/strong\u003e are too vague on their own. The new template helps the employer document which work tasks or goals are affected, what standard actually applies, what results have been achieved, and what concrete deviation needs to be corrected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when there are verifiable deficiencies in work performance, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring quality errors or incorrect deliveries despite clear requirements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereasonable and communicated goals that are not reached over a relevant period,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring delays in work tasks despite clear priorities,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edeficiencies in quality or productivity despite training, instruction, and support,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete deviations from legitimate requirements included in the role.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear and reasonable requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains specific fields for the work task, expected standard, how the requirement has been communicated, and why the requirement is reasonable for the role in question. This reduces the risk of retroactive criticism or expectations that the employee was never made aware of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete events and results\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA separate table makes it possible to document dates, work tasks or goals, expected outcomes, actual outcomes, impact, and relevant supporting data. This provides a more objective basis than general judgments about the employee's personality or attitude.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSupport and professional development documentation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer should check whether the employee has received sufficient onboarding, instruction, training, supervision, resources, and reasonable priorities. The template therefore includes a specific section for previous feedback and support measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA separate section for the employee's version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is given the opportunity to describe circumstances that may have affected their performance, such as unclear instructions, high workload, technical obstacles, competence gaps, or health issues. The employer then documents their assessment following the dialogue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWorkplace adaptation and disability\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf performance may be linked to illness, disability, or reduced work capacity, the employer needs to assess the need for workplace adaptation, rehabilitation, and—where relevant—reasonable accessibility measures. A warning must not replace such obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIndividual improvement and development plan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a structured plan for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat improvement is required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehow the result will be measured,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat support the employer is providing,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edeadlines or timeframes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efollow-up dates and the responsible manager.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf no improvement occurs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), termination by the employer must be based on objective grounds. If performance continues to be deficient, the employer must conduct a new, comprehensive assessment and, among other things, verify the clarity and reasonableness of the requirements, support measures, whether the deficiencies are lasting, whether workplace adaptation or discrimination issues are relevant, and whether reassignment needs to be explored.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot the same as termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document is \u003cstrong\u003enot a notice of termination\u003c\/strong\u003e and is not in itself an automatic disciplinary measure. Any subsequent termination, dismissal, or other intervention must be assessed separately according to LAS, any applicable collective agreements or principal agreements, and the circumstances of the individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgment of receipt without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee’s signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not imply that the employee accepts the employer’s description or assessment. If a signature is refused, a special field is provided to document the handover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is particularly useful in Swedish organizations with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees and is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign labor law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains when the template is appropriate, how to formulate reasonable performance requirements, what facts should be collected, how to document support and competence development, workplace adaptation and discrimination issues, the improvement plan, follow-up, and what needs to be verified if a more serious labor law measure is considered later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/skriftlig-erinran-mall-generell\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you need a broader warning? See also our general template →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow clear must performance requirements be?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer should be able to describe what is expected in an understandable and reasonable manner and demonstrate how the requirements have been communicated. The template is therefore built for both qualitative and quantitative requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the employer provide training or support?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the situation. If the deficiency may be due to insufficient onboarding, competence, unclear instructions, or a lack of prerequisites, the employer should assess what reasonable support measures are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if performance is affected by illness or disability?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn that case, the employer needs to assess, among other things, workplace adaptation, rehabilitation, and any reasonable accessibility measures before the situation is treated solely as misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used as a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate legal requirements and must be assessed independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific employment law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059570323798,"sku":"7350139912495","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-bristande-arbetsprestation-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791156206"},{"product_id":"formellt-bestridande-av-faktura-privatperson","title":"Disputing an invoice – Private individual Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice dispute – private individual\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive consumer law template package for those who wish to protest against an invoice or other payment claim that is entirely or partially incorrect. The package contains Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers current Swedish consumer law, rules regarding debt collection and applications for a payment order, as well as relevant contract and debt law depending on what the invoice concerns.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish dispute template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for full or partial disputes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish dispute template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice dispute – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA dispute does not automatically invalidate the invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA dispute is a clear objection to a payment claim. The important thing is that you \u003cstrong\u003estate in writing that you do not accept the whole or parts of the claim and why\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Swedish Consumer Agency recommends written contact so that you can prove you have protested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used in many common consumer situations, such as when:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eyou have not ordered the product or service,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe price or a fee does not match the agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eyou have already paid the whole or part of the amount,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe product or service has not been delivered or is defective,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eyou have withdrawn from, terminated, or cancelled a contract and still receive an invoice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eonly a part of the invoice is incorrect.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFull or partial dispute\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template has separate fields for the invoiced amount, disputed amount, and any undisputed part. If a part of the invoice is correct, it may in some situations be appropriate to pay the undisputed part and clearly state which part is still being disputed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete grounds instead of vague objections\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template helps you to specify:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einvoice number, date, and amount,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat was actually agreed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat is wrong with the claim,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious contact with the company,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat evidence or documents support your objection,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat you want the company to do – for example, credit the invoice or send a corrected invoice.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDefective product or service\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn invoice dispute does not always replace a complaint (claim). If the objection is based on a product or service being defective, you should also complain about the defect and state what claim you are asserting. The Consumer Sales Act and the Consumer Services Act may provide rights such as remedy, redelivery, price reduction, cancellation, or the right to withhold payment, depending on the situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt collection claims\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the disputed claim is passed on to a collection agency and you still consider it to be incorrect, you must also object to the collection claim. The Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority states that a factually grounded objection could, for example, be that you did not order the product or service, that the delivery does not match the order, or that you have already paid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding the Swedish Enforcement Authority (Kronofogden)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you receive a payment order from the Swedish Enforcement Authority, you must act within the time stated in the letter and lodge an objection there if the claim is still incorrect. A previous dispute to the company or the collection agency does not replace the response to the Swedish Enforcement Authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFraudulent invoice or claim without a contract\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you have not bought anything from the company, you are not obliged to pay just because an invoice has been sent, according to the Swedish Consumer Agency's guidance. The template contains a specific ground for stating that no valid contract exists. In case of suspected fraud or identity theft, you should also consider reporting it to the police.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable, for example, for English-speaking consumers in Sweden or situations where communication with the company takes place in English. It is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide walks you through how to check the agreement and invoice, full and partial disputes, complaints, payment under protest, debt collection, payment orders from the Swedish Enforcement Authority, fraudulent invoices, ARN (National Board for Consumer Disputes), and what documentation you should save.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust I dispute in writing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is strongly recommended because you can then prove that you protested against the claim and when it happened. E-mail works well in many situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I dispute only a part of the invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template has specific fields for the disputed and undisputed amount so that the extent is clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a debt collection claim automatically result in a payment default?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority states that a collection claim in itself does not result in a payment default. However, you should not ignore it – pay if the claim is correct or object if it is wrong.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough that I have already disputed with the company if the Swedish Enforcement Authority gets in touch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. You must respond to the Swedish Enforcement Authority within the time stated in the letter if you still object to the claim.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. Which rights and objections apply depends on the agreement, the type of product or service, and the circumstances in the individual case.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063039111510,"sku":"350139912501","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/bestridande-faktura-privatperson-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791156990"},{"product_id":"formellt-bestridande-av-faktura-foretag","title":"Disputing an invoice – Company Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice dispute – B2B\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive B2B package for companies that need to object to an invoice or other payment claim that is wholly or partially incorrect. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides based on Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Sale of Goods Act, the Interest Act, the Debt Enforcement and Rehabilitation Act, the Limitations Act, rules on applications for injunctions to pay, and contract and debt law principles for B2B relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish dispute template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable B2B template for total or partial disputes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish dispute template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice dispute – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eB2B: start with the agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBetween companies, the agreement, the order, the purchase order, and incorporated general terms are often decisive. Consumer legislation does not normally apply in purely B2B relationships. When purchasing movable property, the Sale of Goods Act may be applicable, but it is dispositive and can be opted out of or modified through agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when the company needs to dispute, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ean invoice without a valid order or from an unauthorized purchaser,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprice, quantity, or hours that deviate from the agreement, quote, or purchase order,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emissing, delayed, or contractually non-compliant delivery,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edefective goods or services that have been complained about,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eduplicate invoices or already paid items,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emissing credit, discount, return, or agreed adjustment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eincorrect penalty interest, fees, or debt collection costs,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea fully or partially incorrect payment claim.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTotal or partial dispute\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate fields for the invoiced amount, disputed amount, and any undisputed portion. This makes it possible to clearly limit the dispute without creating ambiguity regarding the part of the invoice that is actually correct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAgreement, PO, and delivery documentation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new version is specifically adapted for B2B and helps the company link the objection to framework agreements, purchase orders\/POs, accepted quotes, price lists, delivery notes, timesheets, complaints, quality documentation, and other relevant contractual documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSale of goods and services between companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor sales of movable property between companies, the Sale of Goods Act may apply when the agreement does not regulate the issue. For services between companies, there is no general law equivalent to the Consumer Services Act. Therefore, the agreement, industry terms, and general contract law principles often carry greater weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePayment terms and penalty interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Interest Act contains specific rules for payment between traders. As a starting point, a 30-day rule applies to the payment of goods and services unless the creditor has explicitly agreed to a longer payment period. If the due date is determined in advance, penalty interest can normally accrue from the due date. When using the Interest Act levels, the interest is the reference rate plus eight percentage points. However, agreed terms must always be checked first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSet-off and counterclaims\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a specific option to state a counterclaim or set-off objection. Since the conditions for set-off can be complicated, the company should verify that legal requirements are met before leaving an invoice unpaid solely with reference to set-off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePrescription\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor corporate debts, the general limitation period is normally ten years, but limitation interruptions or special rules may affect the assessment. The template therefore has a separate basis for a limitation objection but notes that the underlying facts must be verified before it is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt collection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the disputed claim proceeds to debt collection, the company should also object to the collection claim and attach the previous dispute. A clear and factually based objection should explain why the claim is incorrect and what documentation supports the company's position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eThe Swedish Enforcement Authority (Kronofogden) – extra important for companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company receives an application for an injunction to pay (betalningsföreläggande), it must respond to the Swedish Enforcement Authority within the stated time and object there. A previous dispute sent to the supplier or debt collection agency does not replace the response to the Swedish Enforcement Authority. Furthermore, companies may receive a payment default notice from credit reporting agencies as soon as an application for an injunction to pay is registered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDispute resolution and arbitration clause\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAlways check if the agreement contains a clause regarding general court or arbitration proceedings. For larger amounts, extensive counterclaims, or arbitration clauses, legal advice should be sought early.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies with international suppliers, customers, purchasing functions, or corporate languages in English and is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers the contractual chain, disputed and undisputed amounts, the Sale of Goods Act, B2B services, payment terms, penalty interest, set-off, limitation, debt collection, the Swedish Enforcement Authority, dispute resolution, and practical documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Consumer Sales Act apply between two companies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, normally not. For sales of movable property between companies, the Sale of Goods Act may be relevant instead, but agreed terms often take precedence since the Sale of Goods Act is dispositive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company dispute only part of the invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template has separate fields for the disputed and undisputed amounts so that the scope is clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the invoice goes to the Swedish Enforcement Authority?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe company must object to the Swedish Enforcement Authority within the stated time. A previous dispute to the supplier is not sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an application to the Swedish Enforcement Authority affect the company's credit rating?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Swedish Enforcement Authority states that companies may receive a payment default notice from credit reporting agencies as soon as an application is received.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. For larger or complex B2B disputes, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063048417622,"sku":"350139912518","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/bestridande-faktura-foretag-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791157675"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-engelska","title":"Written Notice – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWritten Notice \/ Reprimand – English template under Swedish employment law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis English-first template package is intended for Swedish employers who need to document misconduct, performance concerns or another work-related deficiency in English. It is designed for workplaces where English is used operationally while the employment relationship remains governed by Swedish law. A Swedish reference version and user guides are included for comparison and internal HR use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe package is structured with reference to the Swedish Employment Protection Act (LAS), discrimination rules, whistleblower protection and relevant work-environment obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnglish Written Notice – Word and PDF,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnglish user guide – Word and PDF,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish reference template – Word and PDF,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish user guide – Word and PDF.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNot automatically a disciplinary sanction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA written notice or reprimand should not automatically be treated as a statutory disciplinary penalty. Its practical purpose is to document what has occurred, clarify the employer's expectations, state what must change and create a reliable record of communication and follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eConcrete facts instead of vague accusations\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template encourages the employer to describe dates, events, instructions, expectations and observed deficiencies as concretely as possible. It also provides space for the employee's response and for documenting follow-up measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCorrection and follow-up\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe document separates the description of the issue from the required corrective action. The employer can specify what is expected, what support or instructions are provided, when follow-up will take place and who is responsible for the process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eImportant employment-law safeguards\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore using a warning as part of a later employment-law process, the employer should consider whether the matter may involve illness, disability, workplace adjustment, discrimination, harassment, whistleblowing, protected leave, trade-union rights or shortcomings in the work environment. A later termination or dismissal is a separate legal process with its own requirements and must not be treated as automatic merely because a written notice has been issued.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEmployee signature\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used so that a signature confirms receipt rather than agreement with the employer's assessment. If the employee does not sign, the employer can document when and how the notice was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFormat and delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English + Swedish reference version.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download; no physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis template is general documentation support and does not replace individual employment-law advice in complex or high-risk cases.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063289131350,"sku":"0350139912525","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/written-notice-english-swedish-law-product-image-2027.png?v=1791159737"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-varning-till-anstalld-mall-engelska","title":"Written Warning to Employee – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten Warning to Employee – English-first template under Swedish employment law\u003c\/strong\u003e for Swedish employers who need to issue a clear, structured and professionally documented warning in English. The package also includes a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Employment Protection Act (LAS), current discrimination rules, whistleblower protection and the Swedish Work Environment Authority's rules on organisational and social work environment and workplace adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Written Warning – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Written Warning – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance for Swedish employers using English at work.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for internal comparison.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guide corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA warning is not automatically a disciplinary sanction\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn ordinary written warning or LAS warning is primarily a documentation and clarification tool. Its purpose is to describe the deficiency, explain what must change and, where appropriate, make clear that continued misconduct may have employment-law consequences. It is \u003cstrong\u003enot by itself a notice of termination\u003c\/strong\u003e and should not automatically be described as a disciplinary sanction unless a collective agreement or other specific rules allow that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuilt for English-speaking workplaces in Sweden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English template is intended for Swedish companies where managers, HR teams or employees use English as a working language. It remains a \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish-law document\u003c\/strong\u003e and is not intended for UK, US or other foreign employment-law systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete facts instead of general accusations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes structured sections for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe specific incident, conduct or performance issue,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edates, context and supporting documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe duty, policy, instruction or work requirement concerned,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious meetings, instructions or support measures,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear correction requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer can define exactly what must change, by when, what support will be provided and how improvement will be followed up. This is preferable to vague phrases such as “improve your attitude” or “perform better”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen employment may be at risk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish Labour Court practice places importance in many misconduct cases on the employee understanding that the employer considers the matter serious and, when relevant, that continued misconduct may affect the employment. The template therefore contains a carefully worded employment-law clarification without suggesting that a future termination has already been decided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIllness, rehabilitation and workplace adjustment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the issue may be connected to illness, reduced work ability or disability, the employer must assess workplace adjustment, rehabilitation and, where relevant, reasonable accessibility measures. A written warning must not replace those obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDiscrimination, harassment and protected activity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the underlying issue involves alleged discrimination, harassment, conflict or degrading treatment, separate investigation or work-environment duties may apply. The employer should also check that the warning is not connected to protected whistleblowing or another legally protected activity. Swedish whistleblower legislation prohibits retaliation against persons who meet the statutory conditions for protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf termination is later considered\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA written warning does not replace the separate assessment required before termination or dismissal. Under LAS, termination by the employer must be based on objective reasons, and reassignment may need to be considered. Before termination for personal reasons, the employee must normally be notified in advance under section 30 LAS, and the local union must be notified at the same time if the employee is unionised.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt does not mean agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template makes clear that the employee's signature confirms receipt only. It does not automatically mean that the employee accepts the employer's description or legal assessment. If the employee refuses to sign, delivery can be documented separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is the primary template in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference so that HR, management and advisers can maintain consistent bilingual documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/skriftlig-varning-till-anstalld-mall\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish Written Warning product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many warnings are required before termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general rule requiring a fixed number of warnings. The assessment depends on the seriousness of the issue, what the employee understood, previous measures and the circumstances as a whole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the employee have to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A refusal to sign does not prevent the employer from documenting delivery. The template includes wording clarifying that a signature confirms receipt only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the warning be used for performance problems?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the expectations have been reasonable and sufficiently clear and the employer also considers whether training, support, workplace adjustment or other measures are relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan this template be used as a termination notice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are subject to separate legal requirements and require their own process and documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific employment-law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063307284822,"sku":"7350139912532","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/written-warning-employee-english-swedish-law-product-image-2027.png?v=1791160948"},{"product_id":"mall-villkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling","title":"Conditional shareholder contribution – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConditional shareholder contribution – complete contribution document for Swedish limited liability companies (aktiebolag)\u003c\/strong\u003e including Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed for situations where an owner wishes to strengthen the company's equity while retaining a conditional possibility for future repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Companies Act's regulations regarding value transfers and profit distributions, current guidance from the Swedish Tax Agency, the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket), and the Swedish Accounting Standards Board, as well as relevant case law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template with conditions for future repayment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConditional Shareholder Contribution – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF with a practical example.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA conditional contribution is not the same as a loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is explicitly designed so that the contribution strengthens the company's equity. \u003cstrong\u003eThe company does not undertake an unconditional repayment obligation through the contribution document itself.\u003c\/strong\u003e Instead, the repayment condition is directed at the shareholders and is based on their commitment to act and vote for repayment when legally permissible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy this structure is important\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency’s guidance states that the actual agreement is of great importance. If a repayment claim is directed at the company instead of the shareholders, the transfer may instead be characterized as debt. The template is therefore built to clearly distinguish the conditional shareholder contribution from a standard loan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe company and the contributor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eContribution amount, payment date, and method of payment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eConditions for future repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRequirement for a legal general meeting resolution prior to repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePriority between multiple conditional shareholder contributions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssignment of the repayment right,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCompany confirmation of receipt,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eJoinder of other shareholders,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBoard\/accounting reference,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eGoverning law, dispute resolution, and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRepayment requires more than just company funds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRepayment of a conditional shareholder contribution is treated under civil law as a profit distribution\/value transfer. This means, among other things, that the company must have distributable funds, that the protection for restricted equity and the prudence rule must be satisfied, and that the general meeting must pass a valid resolution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConsequently, there is no automatic right to demand repayment on a specific date simply because the contribution was made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePriority between multiple contributions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company already has one or more conditional shareholder contributions, the order of priority needs to be documented. The template includes options for equal priority, subordinated priority, and other expressly agreed-upon arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment of the repayment right\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe right to future repayment may need to be handled separately from the shares themselves, for example during a share sale. The template therefore includes a specific section on assignment and consent, as well as guidance on how changes in ownership should be documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and tax\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe regulations of the Swedish Accounting Standards Board state that received shareholder contributions are reported as unrestricted equity. For the contributor, the accounting and tax treatment may differ from an unconditional contribution. The Swedish Tax Agency, among other things, treats the right of repayment separately when calculating capital gains. For larger amounts, group relationships, or changes in ownership, accounting and tax advice should be sought.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest – important difference from a loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard template contains no ongoing interest before a future repayment resolution. The Swedish Tax Agency's guidance indicates that the company does not have a debt-like obligation toward the contributor before the general meeting has decided on repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for, for example, Swedish companies with international owners, board members, or English as their corporate language. It is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign corporate law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the difference between a conditional contribution and a loan, how to fill out the template, why the condition is directed at the shareholders, how future repayment works, priority, interest, accounting, tax, changes in ownership, and common mistakes. A concrete example of partial future repayment is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-ovillkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the contribution not need to be repayable? See also the template for unconditional shareholder contributions →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company promise repayment on a specific date?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis should not be done in a standard document for a conditional shareholder contribution. An unconditional maturity date and direct repayment obligation can change the structure into a loan\/debt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust other shareholders sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the repayment condition to have the intended effect, relevant shareholders should accept the condition. The template therefore includes a specific joinder section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the repayment right be sold separately from the shares?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the Swedish Tax Agency's guidance assumes that the right to repayment can be assigned separately. The assignment and who the rightful holder is should be clearly documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan repayment be made as soon as the company makes a profit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. The corporate law requirements for distributable funds, capital protection, prudence, and a valid general meeting resolution must first be met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting, or tax advice. In the case of multiple owners, multiple contributions, group structures, capital deficits, or larger amounts, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48071519666518,"sku":"7350139912549","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/villkorat-aktieagartillskott-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791161839"},{"product_id":"conditional-shareholder-contribution-template-english-template","title":"Conditional Shareholder Contribution – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConditional Shareholder Contribution – English-first template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for Swedish limited companies that need to document a shareholder contribution which strengthens equity while preserving a conditional right to future repayment. The package also includes a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against Swedish corporate-law rules on value transfers and distributions, current guidance from the Swedish Tax Agency and Accounting Standards Board, and relevant case law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable conditional shareholder contribution agreement.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guidance with examples and repayment logic.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual organisations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guide corresponding to the English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNot the same as a shareholder loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is deliberately structured so that the contribution strengthens the company's equity. \u003cstrong\u003eThe company does not undertake an unconditional repayment debt when the contribution is made.\u003c\/strong\u003e Instead, the repayment condition is directed toward the shareholders and depends on a future lawful resolution when repayment is legally possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the structure matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish Tax Agency guidance makes clear that the actual repayment terms are crucial. If the repayment claim is directed against the company as an unconditional debt, the transaction may instead be treated as a liability rather than a conditional shareholder contribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompany and contributor details,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtribution amount and payment details,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econditions for future repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erequirement for a lawful future general-meeting resolution,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epriority between several conditional shareholder contributions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etransfer of the repayment right,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompany acknowledgement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaccession\/acceptance by other shareholders where relevant,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003egoverning law, dispute clause and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRepayment requires more than available cash\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Swedish law, repayment of a conditional shareholder contribution is treated civilly as a distribution\/value transfer. This means that distributable reserves must be available, the capital-protection and prudence rules must be satisfied, and the general meeting must make a valid decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is therefore no automatic right to repayment on a predetermined date merely because the contribution has been made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePriority between several contributions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company already has one or more conditional shareholder contributions, the order of priority should be documented. The template provides options for equal priority, subordinated priority and another expressly agreed ranking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTransfer of the repayment right\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe right to future repayment may need to be handled separately from the shares, for example in connection with a share sale. The package therefore includes a specific section on transfer and consent, together with guidance on documenting ownership changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and tax considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish accounting guidance treats received shareholder contributions as equity. For the contributor, accounting and tax treatment may differ from an unconditional contribution. The Swedish Tax Agency also treats the repayment right separately in capital-gains calculations. Larger contributions, group structures and ownership changes may justify separate legal, accounting and tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard template does not provide for running interest before a future repayment decision. Swedish Tax Agency guidance states that the company does not have a debt-like obligation toward the contributor until the general meeting has decided on repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is the primary document in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish boards, accountants, advisers and bilingual ownership structures. Both versions are designed for \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not UK, US or other foreign company law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the difference between a conditional shareholder contribution and a loan, how the template is completed, why the repayment condition is directed toward shareholders, how future repayment works, priority, transferability, accounting, tax, ownership changes and common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-villkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company promise repayment on a fixed date?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat should generally be avoided in a standard conditional shareholder contribution. An unconditional due date and direct repayment obligation can make the arrangement resemble a loan or debt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the other shareholders need to accept the condition?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhere the repayment condition is intended to bind future shareholder voting, the relevant shareholders should accept the arrangement. The template includes a dedicated accession\/acceptance section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the repayment right be transferred separately from the shares?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Swedish Tax Agency guidance recognises separate transfer of the repayment right, so the transfer should be documented clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan repayment be made as soon as the company is profitable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. The requirements for distributable reserves, capital protection, prudence and a lawful general-meeting resolution must first be satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting or tax advice. More complex ownership structures, multiple contributions or larger amounts may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48071632126294,"sku":"7350139912556","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/conditional-shareholder-contribution-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791162312"},{"product_id":"mall-ovillkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling","title":"Unconditional shareholder contribution – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUnconditional shareholder contribution – complete contribution document for Swedish limited companies\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed for situations where a shareholder wishes to strengthen the company's equity permanently without creating a debt or retaining the right to future repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review includes current guidance from the Swedish Tax Agency (Skatteverket), the Accounting Standards Board's rules on shareholder contributions, and the Swedish Companies Registration Office's (Bolagsverket) information on registration and share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for an unconditional shareholder contribution.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUnconditional Shareholder Contribution – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF with a practical example.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eUnconditional means no right to repayment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn unconditional shareholder contribution is provided \u003cstrong\u003ewithout any requirement for repayment\u003c\/strong\u003e. The contributor does not acquire a claim against the company, nor does the contribution document create interest or a due date. This is the key difference compared to a conditional shareholder contribution and a loan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is intended for Swedish limited companies where an existing shareholder wants to strengthen the company's financial position permanently, for example in cases of capital deficiency, financing of operations, or ahead of investments and credit assessments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe company and the contributor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtribution amount and date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emethod of payment or other form of contribution,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eexplicit waiver of any right to repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econfirmation that no interest, amortization, or security is created,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaccounting and documentation intent,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe company's acknowledgement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eapplicable law, dispute resolution, and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStrengthens equity – but does not automatically change share capital\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency describes unconditional shareholder contributions as pure capital injections without repayment obligations. The Accounting Standards Board states that received shareholder contributions are recognized as an increase in retained earnings. The contribution does not, however, automatically increase the company's registered share capital and does not in itself imply the issuance of new shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNo registration of the contribution itself with the Swedish Companies Registration Office\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket) does not register the shareholder contribution itself. If the company later wishes to transfer funds from unrestricted equity to share capital, a bonus issue, for example, may be a separate corporate law measure requiring its own decisions and registration requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGeneral tax principle\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency states that an unconditional shareholder contribution is generally not taxable income for the recipient company. The contributor generally has no ongoing right of deduction, but the amount may as a rule be added to the acquisition cost of the shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBFNAR 2025:2 states that a received shareholder contribution shall be recognized as an increase in the item \"retained earnings\" when the commitment is received. For companies providing shareholder contributions and applying the K2 framework, the rules state that the contribution increases the carrying amount of the shares when the commitment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWaiver of claims and other forms of contributions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be adapted for cash contributions or the waiver\/conversion of a claim. In the event of a waiver of a claim, non-cash property, group relations, or other more complex transactions, specific valuation, accounting, and tax issues may arise, and separate advice may be needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf only one of several shareholders provides a contribution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn unconditional contribution may increase the value of all shares in the company. If the contribution is provided disproportionately by only one of several shareholders, shareholder agreements, ownership balances, and potential tax consequences should be reviewed before the document is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCapital deficiency and control balance sheet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn unconditional shareholder contribution can strengthen the company's equity, but it does not replace the board's obligation to independently assess whether the rules regarding a control balance sheet have been triggered. If there is reason to assume a capital deficiency, that issue must be handled without delay.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for Swedish companies with international owners, board members, or an English corporate language. It is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign corporate law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the difference between unconditional contributions, conditional contributions, and loans, how to fill out the template, accounting, taxes, the Swedish Companies Registration Office, capital deficiency, waiver of claims, and common mistakes. A concrete example is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-villkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you want to retain the possibility of future repayment? See the template for a conditional shareholder contribution →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I get back an unconditional shareholder contribution?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a repayment according to the contribution document. An unconditional contribution is provided without any right to repayment. Any potential future dividend or other value transfer is assessed separately according to the Companies Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the contribution increase the company's registered share capital?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The contribution strengthens equity but does not in itself change the registered share capital or the number of shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the shareholder contribution be registered with the Swedish Companies Registration Office?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Companies Registration Office explicitly states that the shareholder contribution itself is not registered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the contribution be provided by a shareholder waiving a claim?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but accounting, valuation, and taxes can be more complex than with a cash contribution. Separate documentation and advice may therefore be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting, or tax advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48071766638934,"sku":"7350139912563","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/ovillkorat-aktieagartillskott-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791163291"},{"product_id":"enkelt-skuldebrev-mall-juridiskt-bindande","title":"Simple promissory note – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSimple Promissory Note – complete template package for loans under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed to document a loan to a specific creditor with clear terms regarding the principal amount, repayment, interest, late payment, assignment, and any collateral.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Promissory Notes Act, the Interest Act, the Statute of Limitations Act, the Contracts Act, and specific consumer credit regulations where applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish simple promissory note – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for private and commercial loans.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish simple promissory note – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSimple Promissory Note – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eWhat is a simple promissory note?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA simple promissory note is issued to a \u003cstrong\u003especific creditor\u003c\/strong\u003e. It differs from a negotiable promissory note and is subject to different rules regarding, for example, assignment. This new template is therefore specifically designed for a clear loan between identified parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecreditor\/lender and debtor\/borrower,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprincipal amount and actual disbursement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efixed due date, amortization schedule, or repayment upon demand,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einterest-free loan or agreed standard interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epenalty interest and handling of late payments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eearly repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eoptional clause for early acceleration (default),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate handling of collateral or guarantees,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eassignment of claims,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epayment details, notices, and documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003echoice of law, dispute resolution, and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIntegrated amortization schedule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a table for amortizations specifying the due date, principal, interest\/fees, and total payment. This makes it easier to document a loan that is to be repaid in multiple installments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest and penalty interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can choose between an interest-free loan and an agreed annual interest rate. For late payments, there is a clear option to use the Interest Act’s standard rule of the reference rate plus eight percentage points, while the template also allows for other valid terms where permitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEarly repayment and early acceleration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template makes it possible to allow the borrower to repay all or part of the debt early. A separate, optional clause regarding early acceleration (default) is included for significant payment delays, but it is worded cautiously as mandatory regulations may limit how such a clause can be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment of a simple promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen assigning a simple promissory note, the new creditor does not, as a general rule, acquire better rights against the debtor than the previous creditor had. The template therefore includes options for free assignment or requirements for the debtor's consent, as well as guidance on written notification and new payment instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCollateral and guarantees kept legally separate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the loan is to be secured by collateral or personal guarantees, this is marked in the promissory note, but the security itself should be documented in a separate pledge or guarantee agreement. This reduces the risk of ambiguity regarding the scope of the security and when it may be claimed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStatute of limitations and evidence\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the central limitation rules and why the parties should save the signed promissory note, proof of payment, amortization history, payment demands, and any acknowledgments. Different limitation periods may apply to ordinary claims versus consumer claims.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding loans from traders to consumers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is primarily intended for private and commercial loans. If a trader provides credit to a consumer, mandatory consumer credit regulations may require, among other things, specific pre-contractual information, credit assessment, and more extensive contractual documentation. Therefore, do not use the standard promissory note as the sole document in such lending.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLoans between limited companies and owners\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf a limited company lends money to a shareholder, board member, CEO, or related party, the Swedish Companies Act's specific rules regarding prohibited loans may apply. This issue must be checked separately before the promissory note is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish businesses or private individuals who need to document the loan in English. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign promissory note.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers the difference between simple and negotiable promissory notes, payment receipts, amortization, interest, penalty interest, early repayment, security, assignment, statute of limitations, applications for summary proceedings (betalningsföreläggande), consumer credit, and loans between companies and owners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a simple promissory note need to be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWitnesses are generally not a formal requirement for an ordinary simple promissory note, but the template includes optional witness lines that can be used if the parties desire additional evidence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the promissory note be interest-free?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template has an explicit option for an interest-free loan. If interest is to be charged, the interest rate, calculation basis, and payment terms should be clearly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the lender sell or assign the claim?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, a simple claim can normally be assigned, but the parties can agree on restrictions. The template includes both options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the template sufficient for a company's consumer loan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot always. Professional lending to consumers is subject to specific mandatory rules and may require additional documentation and controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation support tool and does not replace individual legal, tax, or credit law advice. In cases involving large amounts, collateral, consumer credit, or loans between companies and related parties, qualified professional advice should be sought.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48072242757974,"sku":"7350139912570","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/enkelt-skuldebrev-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791164512"},{"product_id":"framtidsfullmakt-mall-juridiskt-bindande","title":"Enduring Power of Attorney – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eContinuing power of attorney – complete template package according to Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides. The package is designed for you who wish to decide in advance who should be able to represent you in financial and personal matters if you are later no longer able to handle them yourself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Act on Continuing Powers of Attorney, applicable witness rules, rules on examiners, conflicts of interest, gifts, remuneration, activation, and electronic signatures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish continuing power of attorney – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable master template with financial and personal authorizations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish continuing power of attorney – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFuture Power of Attorney – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eTwo witnesses required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe principal must sign or acknowledge their signature in the \u003cstrong\u003esimultaneous presence of two qualified witnesses\u003c\/strong\u003e. The witnesses must be aware that the document is a continuing power of attorney and confirm it themselves with their signatures. The template includes a ready-made witness certificate and specific witness fields.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElectronic signature supported\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFollowing the latest legislative amendment, a continuing power of attorney can also be established electronically. In that case, the principal and both witnesses must use \u003cstrong\u003eadvanced electronic signatures\u003c\/strong\u003e. The requirement for the simultaneous presence of two witnesses still remains. The guide explains how this differs from regular simple e-signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can the continuing power of attorney cover?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template allows you to choose and specify, among other things:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking matters, payments, and day-to-day finances,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etaxes, tax returns, and contact with authorities,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epensions, insurance, and compensation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtracts, claims, and debts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esecurities and other financial assets,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eadministration, sale, purchase, or mortgaging of real estate when this is explicitly stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eadministration, sale, purchase, or mortgaging of a cooperative apartment (bostadsrätt) when this is explicitly stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ematters regarding housing, social care, and personal interests,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother specifically stated financial or personal matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat may not be included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA continuing power of attorney may not grant the attorney the right to make decisions regarding health care or dental care. It also cannot be used for strictly personal legal acts that only the principal can perform, such as drafting a will or entering into marriage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does the power of attorney take effect?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe main rule is that the attorney assesses when the principal, due to illness, mental disorder, weakened health, or similar, is permanently and essentially no longer able to manage the matters the power of attorney concerns. The template also contains an option to choose that the \u003cstrong\u003edistrict court shall always examine the activation\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitutes if the attorney cannot act\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product contains fields for a primary attorney and up to two substitutes. This makes it possible to determine from the outset who shall step in if the first person passes away, resigns from the assignment, or is permanently unable to perform it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExaminer and control\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can appoint a special examiner who has the right to request an accounting of the attorney's work. The template also includes an option to grant the examiner the right to revoke the continuing power of attorney and the possibility to specify regular accounting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGifts and remuneration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains clear choices for whether gifts shall be prohibited, limited to customary personal presents, or permitted according to specific instructions. You can also decide whether the attorney shall work without remuneration, receive reasonable remuneration, or receive a predetermined remuneration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe attorney may not represent the principal in a matter where the attorney themselves or certain related parties have conflicting interests. The template and guide explain this limitation and when a guardian (god man) might need to be appointed for a specific matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate and cooperative apartments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the attorney shall be able to sell, purchase, or mortgage real property or a cooperative apartment, that authorization should be stated explicitly. Therefore, the template contains specific choices and fields for objects, property designation, and limitations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish families and businesses where the principal, attorney, bank, or advisor needs an English-language document. It is not intended as a foreign power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide reviews formal requirements, witness rules, when the power of attorney takes effect, electronic signatures, examiners, gifts, remuneration, conflicts of interest, real estate matters, storage, amendment, and revocation, as well as common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust a continuing power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Two qualified witnesses must be present at the same time and confirm the document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the continuing power of attorney be signed digitally?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the principal and both witnesses use advanced electronic signatures and other formal requirements are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the attorney sell my home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt can be included, but the authorization should be stated explicitly and preferably specified in the power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the attorney make decisions about my medical care?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Medical decisions regarding health care and dental care fall outside the scope allowed for a continuing power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the continuing power of attorney registered automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The creation itself does not mean the document is registered in any public registry. Storage and access to the original are therefore important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation support tool and does not replace individual legal advice. In the case of significant assets, business holdings, real estate transactions, complicated family situations, or international connections, a lawyer should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48082102518102,"sku":"7350139912587","price":99.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/framtidsfullmakt-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791165358"},{"product_id":"fakturamall-privatperson","title":"Invoice \/ payment documentation for private individuals – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice \/ payment documentation for private individuals\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete digital template package for private sales, occasional payment demands, and other situations where you want to document what is to be paid. The package contains Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally and tax reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers current Swedish regulations regarding invoicing, VAT, compensation for work, tax deductions, employer contributions, F-\/A-tax, and penalty interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish invoice \/ payment documentation – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for private payment demands.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice \/ Payment Request – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eAn invoice template does not automatically make you a business owner\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUsing an invoice template does not create F-tax status, VAT registration, or the right to charge VAT. The new version therefore clearly distinguishes between \u003cstrong\u003eprivate sales of personal assets\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003ecompensation for work or assignments\u003c\/strong\u003e, and activities that may in practice constitute a hobby or business operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is suitable when, for example, a private individual wants to document:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea sale of a private item or other personal asset,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea single private payment demand,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea temporary agreement where the parties need clear payment documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea demand where the buyer, amount, payment terms, and bank details need to be clearly stated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot a standard business invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is deliberately designed as an \u003cstrong\u003einvoice \/ payment document\u003c\/strong\u003e. If you conduct taxable economic activity, are VAT registered, or need to issue full VAT invoices, you should use a business-adapted invoice template containing all mandatory information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template contains\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edocument\/invoice number, invoice date, and due date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseller\/payee and buyer\/payer,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003especification of goods or services, quantity, unit price, and total amount,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate choices for private sales, VAT-exempt economic activity, and VAT-registered sales,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esubtotal, VAT, adjustments, and total to pay,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebank account, Bankgiro\/Plusgiro, IBAN, and BIC\/SWIFT,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epenalty interest and payment terms,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecomments and attachments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT – avoid the most common mistake\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor purely private sales of personal assets, you should normally not add VAT simply because the document is called an invoice. However, if you conduct economic activity, VAT regulations may apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency’s current regulations state that a taxable seller covered by the exemption for low annual turnover (maximum SEK 120,000) should not charge VAT and should state that the sale is exempt from VAT pursuant to Chapter 18, Section 4 of the Value Added Tax Act. The template and guide help you distinguish this situation from ordinary private sales.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the payment concerns work or a service\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth the payee and the payer need to be careful here. If a company pays compensation for work to a person with A-tax, the company may need to handle tax deductions and employer contributions. An invoice from the private individual does not automatically shift that responsibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEven between private individuals, there are specific monetary limits and reporting rules when the compensation concerns work. The included guide explains the difference between private sales, service income, hobby, business operation, and self-employment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePrivate sales of personal items\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor occasional sales of personal assets, such as used furniture, clothing, or other property you have had for private use, specific tax rules apply. The Swedish Tax Agency states that the portion of the year’s total profit on personal assets exceeding SEK 50,000 is taxed as capital income.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePenalty interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a separate field for agreed penalty interest or reference to the Interest Act. The Interest Act’s standard rule implies, where relevant, the reference rate plus eight percentage points, but when interest may begin to accrue depends on how the due date was determined and other circumstances. The guide explains this so that a standard phrase is not used thoughtlessly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable when a buyer or payee needs an English-language document, but the transaction should still be assessed according to Swedish rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide walks you through the following step-by-step:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprivate sales versus work\/assignments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehobby versus business operation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eF-tax and A-tax,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployer contributions and tax deductions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAT and the limit for VAT-exempt economic activity,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat information should be included in the payment document,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edue date and penalty interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epartial payment, receipts, and proof of payment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat you can do if payment is not received.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/faktura-mall-gratis-dokumentmall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you run a business? See also our business-adapted invoice template →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrice:\u003c\/strong\u003e free.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a private individual send an invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA private individual can document a payment demand, but the document's heading does not determine how the income is taxed or who handles taxes and fees. That depends on what the payment actually concerns.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAm I allowed to add VAT?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot just because you are using an invoice template. If you are selling personal property as a private individual, you should normally not charge VAT. For economic activities, VAT rules must be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I state that I have F-tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOnly if you are actually approved for F-tax. Otherwise, this information should not be on the document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the template for work done for a company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful as payment documentation, but the company may still have an obligation to make tax deductions and pay employer contributions if you have A-tax. Check the rules before payment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual tax, VAT, or legal advice. For recurring sales, assignments for companies, or larger amounts, the Swedish Tax Agency's current rules should be checked specifically.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48094761320790,"sku":"7350139912594","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/faktura-privatperson-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791166326"},{"product_id":"faktura-mall-gratis-dokumentmall-word-pdf","title":"Invoice template company – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice template for companies\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete, free template package for Swedish companies wanting to create clear and professional customer invoices with the correct basic information. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally and tax-reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the invoice requirements of the Value Added Tax Act, accounting regulations, specific details for limited companies, as well as rules regarding payment terms and late payment interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish invoice template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable, complete company invoice.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish invoice template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Template – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eBuilt for a complete invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Value Added Tax Act specifies the information a complete invoice must contain. The new template therefore has dedicated fields for the invoice date, unique sequential number, VAT number, buyer and seller, delivery\/performance date, a concrete description of the goods or services, taxable base, discounts, tax rate, and tax amount.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template contains\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einvoice number, invoice date, and due date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edelivery\/performance date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecurrency, customer reference, and PO\/purchase order,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseller's company name, organization number, address, and VAT number,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebuyer's full name, address, and VAT number when required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003equantity\/type of goods or scope\/type of service,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunit price excluding VAT, discount, and taxable base,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate fields for 25%, 12%, and 6% VAT,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAT amount and total amount payable,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBankgiro\/Plusgiro, account, IBAN, and BIC\/SWIFT,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epayment terms and late payment interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003especific VAT references and internal checklist.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecific details for limited companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA Swedish limited company's invoices must contain the registered company name, the municipality where the board of directors has its registered office, and the organization number. The new template therefore has separate fields for this information so it is not missed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMultiple tax rates on the same invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf different goods or services are subject to different tax rates, the taxable base must be reported per tax rate. The template contains separate summations for 25, 12, and 6 percent. The applicable tax rate depends on what is actually being sold.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs of April 1, 2026, for example, groceries are normally 6 percent, while restaurant services continue to be subject to 12 percent. Therefore, the correct VAT category should always be verified for the specific sale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompanies with low annual turnover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCompanies based in Sweden may, under certain conditions, be covered by the exemption from VAT liability when the annual turnover is no more than SEK 120,000 during the calendar year and has not exceeded the limit during any of the two preceding calendar years. When the exemption applies, VAT must not be charged on the covered transactions, and the invoice must contain information that the sale is exempt according to Chapter 18, Section 4 of the Value Added Tax Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReverse charge and special cases\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains optional lines for, e.g., \u003cstrong\u003ereverse charge\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eself-billing\u003c\/strong\u003e, and VAT-exempt sales. These texts should not be used as standard – only when the specific transaction is actually covered by that rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePayment terms and late payment interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can specify both agreed payment terms and late payment interest. When the standard rule of the Interest Act applies, the late payment interest is calculated using the reference rate plus eight percentage points. When the interest begins to accrue depends, among other things, on how the due date was determined and what the parties have agreed upon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and archiving\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvoices are normally accounting information. The Swedish Accounting Standards Board (Bokföringsnämnden) states that accounting information must be saved for seven years after the end of the calendar year in which the financial year ended. The guide also explains how customer invoices should be handled and saved in the company's accounting routines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish version under Swedish law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English invoice template is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies that work with international customers or use English as a corporate or working language. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign tax invoice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers complete and simplified invoices, mandatory information, limited company details, tax rates, low annual turnover, EU trade, reverse charge, payment terms, late payment interest, accounting, archiving, and common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/fakturamall-privatperson\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre you a private individual? See our invoice\/payment document for private individuals instead →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrice:\u003c\/strong\u003e free.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat information must be included on a regular company invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA complete invoice must, among other things, include the invoice date, a unique sequential number, the seller's VAT number, the names and addresses of the parties, a concrete description of the delivery, the taxable base, the applied tax rate, and the VAT amount. Special cases may require additional information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the same invoice number multiple times?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A complete invoice must have a unique sequential number based on one or more series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used if the company is exempt from VAT liability?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In that case, remove the VAT amounts and use only the specific reference regarding the exemption when the conditions are actually met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the template for EU invoices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn principle, it can be used, but cross-border sales may require verification of the VAT number, country of taxation, and special references. The guide therefore notes that these situations should be checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general invoicing aid and does not replace individual VAT, tax, or accounting advice. Special cases such as EU trade, construction services, profit margin taxation, and credit notes should always be checked against the Swedish Tax Agency's (Skatteverket) current rules.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48095593595222,"sku":"7350139912617","price":0.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/fakturamall-foretag-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791168189"},{"product_id":"samboavtal-mall-word-pdf","title":"Cohabitation Agreement Template – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:1px solid #d8e3e7;background:#f6fafb;border-radius:12px;padding:18px 20px;margin:0 0 24px;\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 8px;font-size:18px;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCohabitation agreement template – complete 2-in-1 package in Swedish and English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003cp style=\"margin:0;\"\u003eEditable Word template, ready-to-use PDF version, and separate user guides for cohabitants or future cohabitants who want to decide whether the Swedish Cohabitation Act's rules on the division of property should apply in full, not at all, or with clearly specified exceptions. The English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – not an agreement under British or American law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCohabitation agreement according to Swedish law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA cohabitation agreement is used to determine how \u003cstrong\u003ecohabitation property\u003c\/strong\u003e (samboegendom) should be treated in a future division of property. According to the Cohabitation Act (2003:376), cohabitation property mainly consists of the cohabitants' joint home and household goods acquired for joint use. Cohabitants or future cohabitants can agree in writing that a division of property should not take place or that certain property should not be included in the division.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is structured to make that distinction clear. It explicitly distinguishes between \u003cstrong\u003eownership rights\u003c\/strong\u003e and the \u003cstrong\u003eright to division of property\u003c\/strong\u003e: a cohabitation agreement does not automatically transfer ownership of a home or other property, does not in itself create a debt between the parties, and does not replace a will, promissory note, co-ownership agreement, or prenuptial agreement when such documents are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border-left:4px solid #2f817f;background:#eef7f6;padding:14px 16px;margin:22px 0;\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cstrong\u003eImportant to know\u003c\/strong\u003e\n  \u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0;\"\u003eThe Cohabitation Act requires that the cohabitation agreement be in writing and signed by both cohabitants or future cohabitants. The law imposes no formal requirement for witnessing, and cohabitation agreements are generally not registered with any authority. Witnesses can be used voluntarily as evidence, but this is not a prerequisite under Section 9 of the Cohabitation Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included – 8 ready-to-use files\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:12px 0 24px;\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003cth style=\"text-align:left;border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;background:#173a5e;color:#fff;\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n      \u003cth style=\"text-align:left;border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;background:#173a5e;color:#fff;\"\u003eLanguage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n      \u003cth style=\"text-align:left;border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;background:#173a5e;color:#fff;\"\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eCohabitation agreement – main template\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eUser guide for the cohabitation agreement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eSwedish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eCohabitation Agreement – Swedish law\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eEnglish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eUser Guide – Cohabitation Agreement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eEnglish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"border:1px solid #d7dee2;padding:10px;\"\u003eDOCX + PDF\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Word files are editable so the parties can customize names, personal information, property descriptions, and the chosen agreement option. The PDF files provide a stable reference version, and the guides explain how to use the template, which legal issues fall outside the scope of the agreement, and what should be checked before signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThree clear agreement options\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e1. Opting out of the division of property under the Cohabitation Act\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor cohabitants who do not want their cohabitation property to be divided through a division of property according to the general rules of the Cohabitation Act. This does not change ownership rights; each party's ownership must still be assessed according to standard civil law rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2. Excluding specific property\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor cohabitants who want to allow the Cohabitation Act's division rules to apply otherwise but wish to exclude clearly identified property. The template includes an annex where, for example, a specific tenant-owned apartment or other relevant property can be described as precisely as possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e3. Defining a clearly specified property category\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor situations where the parties want to make a more limited exception. The description must be sufficiently clear to determine which property is covered after the fact. In cases of complex arrangements or high values, individual legal advice should be sought.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is intended as general documentation support for cohabitants and future cohabitants under Swedish law, for example when the parties want to create clarity ahead of a home purchase, moving in together, or changing financial circumstances. It can be used both when the parties want to opt out of the division of property entirely and when only certain cohabitation property is to be excluded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhen is it not sufficient on its own?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA cohabitation agreement does not resolve all financial matters between cohabitants. Supplemental documents may be needed if, for example, the parties have different down payments, private loans between them, specific ownership stakes, complex joint ownership, business assets, or wishes regarding inheritance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDifferent down payments:\u003c\/strong\u003e a separate promissory note may be needed to document a claim between the cohabitants. See our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/olika-kontantinsats-sambo-skuldebrev-samboavtal-2026-2027\"\u003especialized package for different down payments, promissory notes, and cohabitation agreements\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAfter separation:\u003c\/strong\u003e if the cohabitation relationship has already ended and property is to be divided, a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bodelning-sambo-mall-bodelningsavtal-sambo-word-pdf-excel\"\u003edivision of property agreement for cohabitants\u003c\/a\u003e may be more relevant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-first:\u003c\/strong\u003e for those who prefer an English-language product page, we also offer the \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/samboavtal-mall-engelska-cohabitation-agreement-swedish-law\"\u003eCohabitation Agreement (Swedish Law)\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCohabitation property – what exactly is covered?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Cohabitation Act does not automatically cover all property owned by cohabitants. The core is the joint home and joint household goods acquired for joint use. For example, savings, securities, and cars are normally excluded from the division of property under the Cohabitation Act. For a home, the \u003cstrong\u003eintent at the time of acquisition\u003c\/strong\u003e is central.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA home that one person already owned and used before the cohabitation relationship began is therefore often not cohabitation property, as it was not acquired for joint use. However, the timing alone does not decide everything. If a home is acquired with the intent that it should become the couple's joint home, the assessment may be different. Therefore, the guide contains specific guidance on how the home should be described and when legal advice is appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOwnership rights and the division of property are two different issues\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is one of the most important differences in the entire package. A cohabitation agreement regulates the extent to which the Cohabitation Act's division rules should be applied. It does not automatically determine who legally owns a home, what ownership stake someone has, or if one cohabitant owes the other money.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf, for example, two cohabitants own a home 50\/50 but have paid different amounts for the down payment, they first need to decide what economic outcome they actually want to achieve. In many such situations, cohabitation agreements are used together with promissory notes. The general cohabitation agreement template is therefore intentionally not designed as a copy of our special package for different down payments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat happens if the cohabitants get married later?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA cohabitation relationship in the sense of the Cohabitation Act ends when the cohabitants marry each other. The cohabitation agreement does not automatically become a prenuptial agreement. If the parties want to regulate what should be separate property after the marriage, they need to assess whether a prenuptial agreement should be drawn up according to the rules for spouses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDivision of property and the deadline after separation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the cohabitation relationship ends for reasons other than the cohabitants marrying each other, a division of property can occur if either cohabitant requests it. As a general rule, the request must be made within one year of the cohabitation relationship ending. The Supreme Court has emphasized that the Cohabitation Act's criteria for when a cohabitation relationship is considered to have ended must be applied strictly; it is not always sufficient that the parties simply say the relationship is over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is an agreement for the time before a potential division of property. It does not replace a property division agreement (bodelningsavtal) that is drawn up when property is actually to be distributed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecial rights may exist despite a cohabitation agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Cohabitation Act contains, among other things, special rules regarding the taking over of a joint home in certain situations and rules regarding consent for certain dispositions. A cohabitation agreement should therefore not be read as if all other provisions in the Cohabitation Act have automatically been opted out of. The guide highlights this as a specific checklist item.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWills and inheritance – a separate issue\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCohabitants do not inherit from each other according to the legal order of succession. A cohabitation agreement is not a will and cannot be used to give the other cohabitant inheritance rights. If the parties want to protect each other in the event of death, they need to consider a separate will and simultaneously take into account, for example, children's right to their legal portion (laglott).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eRead the user guide before you begin editing the agreement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFill in the full details of both parties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eChoose a primary option and remove the alternatives that will not be used in the final version.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDescribe any excluded property clearly enough so that it can be identified later.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCheck if a promissory note, will, or other separate document is needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePrint or finalize the final version and have both parties sign the agreement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSave a copy each, along with relevant annexes and documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon mistakes the guide helps you avoid\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ethinking that the cohabitation agreement automatically changes ownership stakes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003etrying to create a debt through the cohabitation agreement instead of through a promissory note,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003emixing in testamentary provisions in the cohabitation agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eleaving unclear wording regarding which property is to be excluded,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eassuming that everything bought during the cohabitation relationship is cohabitation property,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003emissing that a later marriage requires a new assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003econfusing a cohabitation agreement with a division of property agreement after separation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions about cohabitation agreements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMust a cohabitation agreement be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, witnessing is not a formal requirement under Section 9 of the Cohabitation Act. Both parties must, however, sign the written document. The template has an optional witness section for those who wish to use it as extra evidentiary support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the cohabitation agreement be registered with the Swedish Tax Agency or other authority?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Cohabitation agreements do not have a registration procedure equivalent to, for example, prenuptial agreements. The parties should instead store signed copies and relevant annexes in a secure manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we just exclude a certain home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the Cohabitation Act allows for certain property to be excluded from the division of property. The property should be identified clearly, for example with an address, apartment number, or property designation when relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a cohabitation agreement be changed later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Cohabitants can change what they have previously agreed upon by creating a new agreement. For major changes, it is often better to draw up a new, clear full version than to work with several difficult-to-interpret addendums.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the agreement protect a larger down payment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. The cohabitation agreement regulates the division of property, but does not automatically document a claim. If one party has invested more money and the parties want the difference to be repaid, a promissory note may be needed depending on the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the English version an agreement under UK or US law?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an English-language version of a document designed for Swedish conditions and Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"border:1px solid #e3d8c2;background:#fffaf1;border-radius:10px;padding:16px 18px;margin:24px 0;\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\n  \u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0;\"\u003eLegal basis: The Cohabitation Act (2003:376), specifically the rules on cohabitation property, division of property, cohabitation agreements, taking over, and consent. Relevant case law regarding the timing of the termination of a cohabitation relationship has also been taken into account.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template is general documentation support designed in accordance with Swedish law. It does not replace individual legal advice. In cases of significant values, complex ownership relationships, international connections, disputes, minors\/guardianships, or uncertainty about the home's legal status, professional advice should be sought.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48095900860758,"sku":"7350139912624","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/samboavtal-mall-word-pdf-svenska-engelska.jpg?v=1791170269"},{"product_id":"generalfullmakt-mall-word-pdf","title":"General Power of Attorney – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – comprehensive template package according to Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed for individuals and companies needing to grant an agent broad, yet clearly defined, authority to represent the principal in financial, administrative, and other permitted legal transactions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the power of attorney rules of the Contracts Act, specific formal requirements for real estate, and current guidance on bank powers of attorney and the distinction between a standard power of attorney and an enduring power of attorney (framtidsfullmakt).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish General Power of Attorney – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable master template with selectable powers and restrictions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish General Power of Attorney – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed step-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA general power of attorney does not mean unlimited rights\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA broad power of attorney can cover many different legal transactions, but the authority is determined by \u003cstrong\u003ewhat is actually stated in the power of attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e and by special rules for certain types of matters. The new template therefore uses selectable authorizations, monetary limits, and specific restrictions rather than a general assertion that the agent may do \"everything\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template can cover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eongoing financial management and payments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eentering into, amending, and terminating contracts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtact with authorities and public bodies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einsurance, subscriptions, and supplier agreements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereceivables, debts, and payment arrangements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking matters to the extent accepted by the bank,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esecurities and financial assets according to specific instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal estate and tenant-owned properties when specific authorization is stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother explicitly stated financial or administrative matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAuthority and internal instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn practice, the Contracts Act distinguishes between what the agent is authorized to do externally and the internal instructions provided by the principal. If a restriction is important, it should therefore be stated directly in the power of attorney that a third party will see. The template includes specific fields for prohibited actions, monetary limits, and other instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate – specific formal requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor agreements regarding the \u003cstrong\u003epurchase, exchange, or gift of real estate\u003c\/strong\u003e, Section 27 of the Contracts Act requires the power of attorney to be in writing. The template therefore includes a separate real estate section where the property, the type of legal transaction, and price and condition limits can be clearly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor title registration and other land registration matters, additional documents may need to be submitted to the Swedish Mapping, Cadastral and Land Registration Authority (Lantmäteriet).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBanking matters – bank-specific requirements may apply\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory requirement for a standard form for a standard power of attorney, but banks often have their own security requirements. They may require a written and witnessed power of attorney, and in some cases, that the bank's own form be used. The template therefore includes a clear bank section and a reminder that the bank's routines should be verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBankID and personal security solutions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney does not imply that the agent may use the principal's personal BankID, security token, PIN code, or other personal authentication credentials. Such solutions are governed by the respective provider's terms and conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGifts and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA very broad authority to make gifts can create significant risk. The new template therefore has separate options to prohibit gifts, limit them to customary personal presents, or provide an explicit gift instruction. It also highlights the risks associated with legal transactions where the agent themselves or their next of kin benefit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney can be made for an indefinite period, for a limited time, or tied to a specific assignment. The Contracts Act contains different rules on revocation depending on how the power of attorney was made known. For a written power of attorney held and presented by the agent, the document should be retrieved or destroyed, and third parties who have registered or are aware of the power of attorney should be notified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #d6dce3;border-radius:12px;background:#f7f5f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding death and future incapacity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard power of attorney \u003cstrong\u003edoes not automatically cease simply because the principal dies\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Contracts Act contains a special rule on continued effect unless special circumstances suggest otherwise. If the principal is placed under guardianship, however, the effect of the power of attorney may be limited within the scope of the guardian's assignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the purpose is for someone to be able to represent you only when you are no longer able to manage your affairs, you should consider an \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/framtidsfullmakt-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eenduring power of attorney (framtidsfullmakt)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot for strictly personal legal transactions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general power of attorney is not intended for actions that by law or by their nature must be performed personally, such as executing a will or entering into marriage. Special rules may also limit representation in other situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVoluntary witnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard general power of attorney has no general statutory requirement for witnessing. Witnesses can nevertheless be used as additional proof, and certain banks or other recipients may have their own requirements. The new template therefore provides optional witness fields without incorrectly claiming that witnessing is always required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish individuals and companies who need an English-language document but where the power of attorney must still be assessed according to Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/generalfullmakt-mall-engelska-general-power-of-attorney\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNeed an English-first product page? See General Power of Attorney – Swedish law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers how to complete the template, the distinction between authority and internal instructions, bank requirements, real estate power of attorney, gifts and conflicts of interest, revocation, death, guardianship, and when a special power of attorney or enduring power of attorney is more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a general power of attorney completely unlimited?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The scope is determined by the wording of the power of attorney, applicable legal rules, and the requirements of the recipient. This template is intentionally built with selectable powers and restrictions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the general power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not as a general rule. However, banks and other recipients may have their own requirements for witnessing or a specific form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agent buy or sell real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can be included if the authority is clearly stated. For agreements regarding the purchase, exchange, or gift of real estate, the power of attorney must be in writing according to Section 27 of the Contracts Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the power of attorney cease automatically when the principal dies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not according to the general rule of the Contracts Act. Section 21 contains a special rule on continued effect, but special circumstances may mean that the power of attorney is considered to have expired.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a general power of attorney the same as an enduring power of attorney (framtidsfullmakt)?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. An enduring power of attorney is regulated by a special law and is specifically intended for the situation where the principal can no longer manage their affairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. In the case of real estate transactions, major capital management, corporate issues, gifts to the agent or next of kin, international circumstances, or other high financial risks, qualified advice should be considered.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48105885073750,"sku":"7350139912631","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/generalfullmakt-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791178397"},{"product_id":"generalfullmakt-mall-engelska-general-power-of-attorney","title":"General Power of Attorney – English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English-first template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for individuals and businesses that need to authorise another person to act on their behalf in financial, administrative and other permitted legal matters. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Contracts Act rules on authority and revocation, the special written-form requirement for certain real-estate transactions and current guidance on bank powers of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed step-by-step guidance for use under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual organisations and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eBroad authority does not mean unlimited authority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general power of attorney can cover many different legal acts, but the agent's authority is determined by \u003cstrong\u003ethe wording of the document\u003c\/strong\u003e and by any special legal rules that apply to the transaction. This template therefore uses selectable powers, monetary limits and specific restrictions rather than claiming that the agent may simply do “everything”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe template can cover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eday-to-day financial administration and payments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eentering into, changing and terminating contracts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacts with public authorities and other organisations,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einsurance, subscriptions and supplier agreements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eclaims, debts and payment arrangements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebank matters to the extent accepted by the relevant bank,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esecurities and financial assets where expressly authorised,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal estate and condominium\/co-operative housing matters where specifically stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother expressly defined financial or administrative matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAuthority and internal instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish agency law distinguishes between the agent's outward authority and the principal's internal instructions. If a restriction is important, it should therefore be stated directly in the document shown to third parties. The template contains dedicated fields for prohibited actions, monetary limits and other instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate – written authority required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 27 of the Swedish Contracts Act, authority to enter into an agreement for the \u003cstrong\u003epurchase, exchange or gift of real property\u003c\/strong\u003e must be in writing. The template therefore contains a separate real-estate section where the property, transaction type and any price or condition limits can be specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional documents may be required for land-registration matters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBank matters – the bank may impose its own requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory form that every ordinary power of attorney must follow. Banks may nevertheless require a written and witnessed power of attorney and may insist on their own form. The package therefore includes a dedicated banking section and a clear reminder to check the bank's current procedures before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBankID and personal security credentials\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney does not authorise the agent to use the principal's personal BankID, security token, PIN code or other personal authentication credentials. Those services are governed by the relevant provider's terms and security rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGifts and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVery broad gift authority can create significant risk. The template therefore includes options to prohibit gifts, limit them to customary personal gifts or add an explicit gift instruction. It also highlights transactions in which the agent or a related person could benefit personally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney can be made indefinite, time-limited or linked to a specific assignment. The Swedish Contracts Act contains different revocation rules depending on how the power of attorney has been communicated. A written instrument held and presented by the agent should generally be recovered or destroyed when revoked, and third parties that have registered or relied on the authority should be informed where relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #d6dce3;border-radius:12px;background:#f7f5f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: death and future incapacity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn ordinary Swedish power of attorney does \u003cstrong\u003enot automatically terminate solely because the principal dies\u003c\/strong\u003e. Section 21 of the Swedish Contracts Act contains a specific rule under which the authority may remain effective unless particular circumstances indicate otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the purpose is instead to appoint someone who should act once you permanently lose the ability to manage your own affairs, consider a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/framtidsfullmakt-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFuture Power of Attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e, which is governed by separate legislation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot suitable for strictly personal legal acts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general power of attorney is not intended for acts that by law or their nature must be performed personally, such as making a will or entering into marriage. Other transactions can also be subject to special representation rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitnesses are optional as a general rule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory requirement that an ordinary general power of attorney be witnessed. Witnesses can nevertheless provide additional evidence, and banks or other recipients may impose their own requirements. The template therefore contains optional witness fields without incorrectly presenting witnessing as mandatory in every case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary template in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish boards, banks, advisers and bilingual organisations. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/generalfullmakt-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first product? See the Swedish Generalfullmakt package →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain how to complete the template, the difference between authority and internal instructions, bank requirements, real-estate authority, gifts and conflicts of interest, revocation, death, guardianship and when a special-purpose or future power of attorney may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a General Power of Attorney give unlimited authority?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The agent's powers depend on the wording of the document, applicable law and any requirements imposed by the receiving organisation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have to be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general legal requirement. A bank or other recipient may nevertheless require witnesses or its own form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agent buy or sell real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat can be included if the authority is stated clearly. For agreements concerning the purchase, exchange or gift of real property, Swedish law requires written authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the power of attorney automatically end when the principal dies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not under the general rule in section 21 of the Swedish Contracts Act. Particular circumstances can, however, mean that the authority should be treated as terminated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this the same as a Future Power of Attorney?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A Future Power of Attorney is governed by separate Swedish legislation and is specifically designed for future permanent incapacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. Real-estate transactions, substantial investment authority, corporate matters, gifts to agents or related persons, international arrangements or other high-value matters may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48105908961622,"sku":"7350139912648","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/general-power-of-attorney-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791178871"},{"product_id":"framtidsfullmakt-mall-engelska-future-power-of-attorney","title":"Future Power of Attorney – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFuture Power of Attorney – English-first template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for individuals who want to appoint a trusted person to manage specified financial and personal matters if they later permanently lose the ability to handle those matters themselves. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Future Powers of Attorney Act (2017:310), including the electronic-signature amendment that entered into force on 1 July 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFuture Power of Attorney – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFuture Power of Attorney – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step instructions covering formal requirements, witnesses, entry into force and common mistakes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual families and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eTwo witnesses are required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe principal must sign the instrument, or acknowledge the signature, in the \u003cstrong\u003esimultaneous presence of two eligible witnesses\u003c\/strong\u003e. The witnesses must know that the document is a future power of attorney and confirm it with their signatures. The appointed attorney may not act as a witness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElectronic signing is now possible\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSince 1 July 2026, a Swedish future power of attorney may also be signed electronically. In that case the principal and both witnesses must use \u003cstrong\u003eadvanced electronic signatures\u003c\/strong\u003e. The requirement that the two witnesses be present simultaneously remains. A basic click-sign or pasted signature is therefore not automatically sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can the power cover?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template lets you select and tailor powers relating to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking, payments and day-to-day finances,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etax matters and contacts with public authorities,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epensions, insurance and benefits,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtracts, claims and debts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esecurities and financial assets,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal property and tenant-owned apartments where expressly stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehousing, social-care and other personal matters permitted by law,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother specifically defined financial or personal affairs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat cannot be covered?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA Swedish future power of attorney cannot authorise the attorney to make decisions within healthcare or dental care. It also cannot be used for strictly personal legal acts that only the principal can perform, such as making a will, entering into marriage or acknowledging parenthood.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does it enter into force?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe general rule is that the attorney assesses when the principal, due to illness, mental disorder, weakened health or a similar condition, permanently and essentially can no longer manage the matters covered by the document. The template also contains an option requiring the \u003cstrong\u003eDistrict Court to determine entry into force\u003c\/strong\u003e before the instrument may be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitute attorneys\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package includes fields for a primary attorney and up to two substitutes. This makes it possible to specify in advance who should step in if the first attorney dies, resigns or is permanently unable to perform the assignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReviewer and accounting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can appoint a reviewer who is entitled to request accounts from the attorney. The template also allows you to specify regular reporting and, if desired, authorise the reviewer to revoke the future power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGifts and remuneration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains clear options for gifts: no gifts, customary personal presents only, or specifically authorised gifts. You can also state whether the attorney should act without remuneration, receive reasonable remuneration under the Act or receive compensation under specified conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe attorney may not represent the principal in matters where the attorney, or certain related persons, have conflicting interests. The template highlights this limitation and explains that another representative may be needed for that specific matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal property and tenant-owned apartments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the attorney should be able to sell, buy or mortgage real property or a tenant-owned apartment, that authority should be stated expressly and preferably with identifying information and any limitations. The template includes dedicated sections for these transactions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNo public register\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCreating a future power of attorney does not automatically register it in a public register. The original document, or the electronically signed original file where applicable, should therefore be stored securely and its location made known to relevant persons.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary template in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish banks, authorities, advisers and bilingual families. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/framtidsfullmakt-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first product? See the Swedish Framtidsfullmakt package →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the formal requirements, witness eligibility, entry into force, electronic signing, reviewer controls, gifts, remuneration, conflicts of interest, property powers, storage, amendment, revocation and common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a Future Power of Attorney have to be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Two eligible witnesses must be present simultaneously and confirm the instrument.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be signed electronically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Since 1 July 2026, electronic signing is permitted if the principal and both witnesses use advanced electronic signatures and the other formal requirements are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the attorney make healthcare decisions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Decisions within healthcare and dental care are outside the permitted scope of a Swedish future power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the attorney sell my home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat can be included, but the authority should be stated expressly and preferably identify the property or apartment and any relevant conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document automatically registered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The instrument is not automatically entered in a public register when it is created.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. Larger asset holdings, company ownership, real-estate transactions, complex family situations or international connections may justify professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48105937961302,"sku":"7350139912655","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/future-power-of-attorney-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791179368"},{"product_id":"samboavtal-mall-engelska-cohabitation-agreement-swedish-law","title":"Cohabitation Agreement – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCohabitation Agreement – English-first template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for cohabitees or prospective cohabitees who want to decide whether the Swedish Cohabitees Act rules on division of cohabitation property should apply in full, not at all, or with clearly defined exclusions. The package includes an English Word\/PDF agreement, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Cohabitees Act (2003:376), current Swedish Tax Agency guidance and recent Supreme Court case law on when a cohabitation relationship is deemed to have ended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCohabitation Agreement – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCohabitation Agreement – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on property, exclusions, signing and common mistakes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual households and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eWhat a Swedish cohabitation agreement actually does\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 9 of the Swedish Cohabitees Act, cohabitees or prospective cohabitees may agree that \u003cstrong\u003eno statutory division shall take place\u003c\/strong\u003e or that \u003cstrong\u003especified property shall be excluded from such division\u003c\/strong\u003e. The agreement must be in writing and signed by both parties. Witnesses are not a statutory validity requirement and the agreement is not registered with an authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThree clear agreement options\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1. Exclude statutory division entirely\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor couples who want the Cohabitees Act division rules not to apply between them. This does not change legal ownership; each person's ownership must still be assessed under ordinary property and contract law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2. Exclude specified property\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor couples who want the statutory rules to apply generally but wish to exclude clearly identified property, such as a particular home. The template includes a dedicated appendix for precise identification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e3. Exclude a clearly defined property category\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor narrower arrangements where a specific category of cohabitation property should be kept outside a future division. The wording must be sufficiently clear to identify what is covered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat counts as cohabitation property?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Cohabitees Act does not automatically cover everything the parties own. The core category is the \u003cstrong\u003ejoint home and household goods acquired for joint use\u003c\/strong\u003e. The purpose at the time of acquisition is important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA home that one party already owned and used before the cohabitation began is therefore often outside the statutory category because it was not acquired for joint use. A home acquired with the intention that it become the couple's shared home may be treated differently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOwnership and division rights are different\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA cohabitation agreement regulates whether statutory division rules apply. It does \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e automatically change ownership shares in a home, create a debt between the parties or decide who paid more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf one partner contributed more to the purchase and the parties want that difference to be repaid, a separate promissory note may be needed depending on the intended arrangement. See our \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/olika-kontantinsats-sambo-skuldebrev-samboavtal-2026-2027\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003especialised package for unequal cash contributions, promissory note and cohabitation agreement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWills and inheritance are separate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA cohabitation agreement is \u003cstrong\u003enot a will\u003c\/strong\u003e. Cohabitees do not inherit from each other under the statutory order of succession. If the parties want inheritance protection, they should consider a separate will and the formal requirements applicable to wills.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeparation and the one-year deadline\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf cohabitation ends for a reason other than the parties marrying each other, a statutory division can take place if requested by one of the cohabitees. The request must generally be made within one year after the cohabitation legally ended. Recent Supreme Court case law has emphasised that the statutory criteria for when cohabitation ends are applied strictly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is for the agreement made before a possible division. If the relationship has already ended and property is being distributed, a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bodelning-sambo-mall-bodelningsavtal-sambo-word-pdf-excel\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003edivision-of-property agreement for cohabitees\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSome statutory rights may still remain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA section 9 cohabitation agreement does not automatically remove every other rule in the Cohabitees Act. The Act contains, among other things, special rules on takeover of certain rented or tenant-owned homes and consent requirements for some dispositions involving the common home and household goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the parties later marry\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cohabitation relationship under the Cohabitees Act ends when the parties marry each other. This agreement does not automatically become a prenuptial agreement. If the parties later wish to regulate separate property as spouses, a separate prenuptial agreement should be considered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNo registration and no mandatory witnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement must be written and signed by both cohabitees or prospective cohabitees. Swedish law does not impose a general witness requirement for a section 9 cohabitation agreement, and there is no authority registration procedure comparable to registration of a Swedish prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes optional witness lines for parties who want additional evidentiary support without presenting witnessing as a legal validity requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English agreement is the primary document in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish banks, advisers, authorities and bilingual households. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign cohabitation agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/samboavtal-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish Samboavtal product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhen the template is suitable and when it is not enough,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat counts as cohabitation property,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe difference between ownership and division rights,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehow to exclude property clearly,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhen a promissory note or will may also be needed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe one-year deadline after separation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehome-takeover and consent rules that may still apply,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat happens if the parties later marry,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecommon drafting and signing mistakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a Swedish cohabitation agreement need witnesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Witnessing is not a statutory validity requirement under section 9 of the Cohabitees Act. Both parties must sign the written agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the agreement have to be registered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A Swedish cohabitation agreement is not submitted to an authority for registration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we exclude only one specific home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Act permits specified property to be excluded. The property should be described precisely enough to identify it later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the agreement protect a larger cash contribution?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. The cohabitation agreement regulates division under the Cohabitees Act but does not automatically create a repayment claim. A separate promissory note may be needed depending on the arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo cohabitees inherit from each other?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not under the statutory order of succession. A separate will should be considered if inheritance protection is desired.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. High-value assets, disputed ownership, international connections, guardianship issues or complex co-ownership arrangements may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48107429691734,"sku":"7350139912662","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/cohabitation-agreement-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791179951"},{"product_id":"lopande-skuldebrev-mall-word-pdf-foretag-privatperson","title":"Negotiable Promissory Note Template – Word\/PDF + English + Guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNegotiable promissory note – complete template package under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is intended for companies and private individuals who specifically need a promissory note designed to be transferable under the special rules of the Swedish Promissory Notes Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Promissory Notes Act, Interest Act, Limitation Act and current and adopted consumer-credit legislation where applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish negotiable promissory note – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template with a choice between an order note and a bearer note.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish negotiable promissory note – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNegotiable Promissory Note – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish-language Word + PDF version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eDetailed English guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eWhat makes a promissory note “negotiable”?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Section 11 of the Swedish Promissory Notes Act, a promissory note is negotiable when it is made \u003cstrong\u003epayable to bearer\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003epayable to a specified person or order\u003c\/strong\u003e. This is not merely a heading. The wording affects who may enforce the claim and the legal consequences of a later transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrder note or bearer note – choose one\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main template contains two clearly separated alternatives that should not be used at the same time:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOrder promissory note:\u003c\/strong\u003e payable to a named creditor or order and transferable through a traceable chain of endorsements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBearer promissory note:\u003c\/strong\u003e payable to the bearer. The person in possession of the original instrument is generally presumed to be entitled to demand payment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor many private and smaller commercial loans, an order note is easier to administer than a bearer note. If transferability is not needed at all, a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/enkelt-skuldebrev-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003esimple promissory note\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e is often a more controlled alternative.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAn important difference from a simple promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA new holder who acquires possession of a negotiable promissory note in good faith can, in certain situations under Section 15 of the Swedish Promissory Notes Act, be protected against objections that the debtor could have raised against the previous creditor. This is one of the most important reasons why negotiable promissory notes should be used with greater care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOnly one signed original\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous version of the product recommended one original for each party. That is not appropriate for a negotiable promissory note. The new template and guide therefore use \u003cstrong\u003eone signed original only\u003c\/strong\u003e. The debtor may retain a clearly marked copy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the debt has been paid in full, the original instrument should be returned to the debtor and preferably marked as paid in full or cancelled. For interest and instalment payments, the package includes a separate receipt and payment-history schedule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template regulates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003edebtor\/borrower and original creditor\/lender,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003echoice between order and bearer promissory note,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eprincipal amount and evidence of disbursement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003esingle payment, instalment plan or payment after notice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003einterest-free loan or agreed ordinary interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003edefault interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eearly repayment and a cautiously drafted acceleration clause,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003etransfer and presentation of the original instrument,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eseparate pledge or guarantee arrangements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003epayment details, notices and special instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eendorsement fields for order notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003epayment and receipt history.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest and default interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used for both interest-free and interest-bearing loans. Where the default rule in Section 6 of the Swedish Interest Act applies to late payment, the rate corresponds to the reference rate plus eight percentage points. If the claim already bears interest, Section 7 may affect the rate after the due date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLimitation periods – a special rule for negotiable promissory notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main rule under the Swedish Limitation Act is ten years. The special three-year limitation period for certain consumer claims expressly \u003cstrong\u003edoes not apply\u003c\/strong\u003e to claims based on negotiable promissory notes. The guide therefore covers documentation of payments, demands and interruption of limitation periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant for consumer credit purchases\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA negotiable promissory note is not a suitable standard document for all consumer-credit situations. In a credit purchase, a creditor may not accept a negotiable promissory note that restricts the consumer's right to raise objections if the instrument is later transferred or pledged to a good-faith creditor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe current Swedish Consumer Credit Act applies through 19 November 2026. The new Consumer Credit Act enters into force on 20 November 2026 and retains a corresponding prohibition. The package therefore clearly states that professional consumer lending may require different and more extensive documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEndorsements and payment history\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe order-note template includes an appendix with multiple endorsement fields so that transferor, transferee, date and acknowledgement can be documented together with the original instrument. A separate payment schedule makes it possible to track principal, interest, outstanding balance and acknowledgement after each payment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity – keep pledges and guarantees separate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the loan is secured by a pledge or guarantee, the promissory note can refer to a separate security document. The pledge or guarantee undertaking should itself be documented separately so that its scope, formal requirements and conditions remain clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWitnessing is normally not a general formal requirement for a promissory note. The template contains optional witness fields for parties who want additional evidential support, without incorrectly presenting witnesses as a validity requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies and private individuals who need the document in English while the claim remains governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain, among other things:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe difference between negotiable and simple promissory notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe difference between order and bearer notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhy only one original should be signed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ehow disbursement, instalments and interest are documented,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ehow transfers and endorsements are handled,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003erules on presentation and return of the original instrument,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003elimitation periods,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003econsumer-credit restrictions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003epledges, guarantees, witnesses and common mistakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a negotiable and a simple promissory note?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA negotiable promissory note is specifically designed for transfer and can give a good-faith new holder stronger legal protection. With a simple promissory note, a new creditor generally does not obtain better rights than the previous creditor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould both parties have an original?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. For a negotiable promissory note, normally only one original should be signed. The other party may keep a clearly marked copy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a negotiable promissory note be interest-free?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template contains both interest-free and interest-bearing alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for consumer credit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general standard document. Mandatory consumer-credit rules apply, and negotiable promissory notes are expressly prohibited in certain credit-purchase situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the promissory note need witnesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general rule. Optional witnesses may be used as additional evidential support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, credit-law or tax advice. For larger amounts, professional lending, international parties, complex security arrangements or planned trading in the claim, qualified advice should be considered.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48107547459926,"sku":"7350139912679","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/lopande-skuldebrev-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791244443"},{"product_id":"dispute-of-invoice-template-sweden","title":"Invoice Dispute – Private Consumer | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Private Consumer\u003c\/strong\u003e is an English-first template package governed by Swedish law for consumers who need to object to an invoice or other payment claim from a business. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against current Swedish consumer-law guidance, the Consumer Sales Act, the Consumer Services Act, the Debt Collection Act, Finansinspektionen's current debt-collection rules and the Swedish Enforcement Authority's procedure for orders for payment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template for a full or partial objection.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance covering the invoice, debt collection and Kronofogden.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensmall – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual households and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensguide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNo invented 30-day or 7-day dispute deadline\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe old product text stated a general 30-day period and suggested that an invalid invoice should preferably be disputed within seven days. That is not a safe general rule. The updated package instead instructs the consumer to object \u003cstrong\u003epromptly and in writing\u003c\/strong\u003e, explain why the claim is incorrect and retain evidence of the objection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eyou never ordered the goods or service,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe invoiced price or fee differs from the agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eyou have already paid all or part of the amount,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003egoods or services were not delivered,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003egoods or services are defective or incomplete,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eyou cancelled, terminated or exercised a right of withdrawal but are still being charged,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eonly part of the invoice is incorrect,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eyou suspect a scam invoice or identity misuse.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA dispute does not automatically make an invoice “void”\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA written objection records that you do not accept the payment claim and explains why. It does not by itself decide the legal dispute. If the business maintains that the claim is valid, the matter may ultimately need to be decided through dispute resolution or a court.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFull or partial dispute\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate fields for the total invoiced amount, the amount disputed and any undisputed amount. If only part of the invoice is incorrect, it may in some situations be appropriate to pay the undisputed part and clearly object to the remainder.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDefective goods or services\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn invoice dispute does not always replace a consumer complaint. If your objection is based on defective goods or services, you should normally also complain about the defect and state the remedy you seek, such as repair, replacement, price reduction or termination when the legal requirements are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe package therefore includes fields for order details, previous contact, supporting evidence and the specific corrective action requested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf you never entered into an agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you did not order anything, Swedish consumer guidance states that you are not required to pay merely because a business sends you an invoice. You should nevertheless notify the business in writing that you do not accept the claim. The template contains a specific option for “no order \/ no valid agreement”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePaying under protest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn some situations a consumer may choose to pay under protest instead of leaving the amount unpaid, while preserving a claim for repayment. Whether that is sensible depends on the circumstances. The user guide explains the distinction without presenting either method as universally preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the claim goes to debt collection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA debt-collection demand is not the same thing as a court judgment and does not itself create a payment-default record. If you still consider the claim incorrect, object to the debt-collection demand promptly or at least within the time stated in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFinansinspektionen's current guidance states that where the debtor has a factually grounded objection, the debt-collection company should investigate the issue, obtain the creditor's position and inform the debtor of the outcome. Examples include that the goods or services were never ordered, the delivery does not match the agreement or payment has already been made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCurrent debt-collection rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFinansinspektionen took over full supervisory responsibility for the Swedish Debt Collection Act in 2024. New binding regulations and general guidance on good debt-collection practice have applied since 1 July 2025. The updated guide therefore refers to Finansinspektionen rather than outdated supervisory guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eIf Kronofogden sends an order for payment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA previous objection sent to the business or debt-collection company is \u003cstrong\u003enot enough\u003c\/strong\u003e. If you receive an order for payment from the Swedish Enforcement Authority (Kronofogden), you must respond within the time stated in that letter and tell Kronofogden that you object to the claim.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can object to all or part of the claim. If the applicant wants to continue after your objection, the case can be transferred to a court for determination.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eScam invoice or identity misuse\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you never entered into an agreement and suspect fraud or identity misuse, dispute the claim in writing, retain all evidence and consider reporting the matter to the police. If the same claim later reaches debt collection or Kronofogden, object there as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWritten evidence matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template encourages you to identify:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003einvoice\/reference number and date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe full and disputed amounts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhat was actually agreed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhat is incorrect,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eprevious communication,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ereceipts, order confirmations, screenshots or other evidence,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe action you want the business to take.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEmail is often useful because it leaves a dated copy showing what was sent. The package also includes signature fields for cases where the dispute is sent by post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eARN or court\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you and the business cannot agree, many consumer disputes can be reviewed by the Swedish National Board for Consumer Disputes (ARN), provided the dispute falls within its scope and current value thresholds. A disputed payment claim may also proceed to a district court if the creditor continues to pursue it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish businesses, authorities, advisers and bilingual consumers. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law invoice dispute template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bestridande-faktura-privatperson\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See Bestridande av faktura – Privatperson →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the practical workflow from the first invoice through debt collection and, if necessary, Kronofogden. They also cover partial disputes, defective goods\/services, paying under protest, scam invoices, evidence and common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there always a 30-day deadline to dispute an invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no safe general rule that every incorrect consumer invoice must be disputed within exactly 30 days. Object promptly and in writing and follow any specific deadline stated in an official demand or proceeding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to pay an invoice for something I never ordered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot merely because an invoice has been sent. If no valid agreement exists, notify the business in writing that you dispute the payment claim.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if only part of the invoice is wrong?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template allows a partial objection. Clearly identify the disputed amount and, where appropriate, handle the undisputed part separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if I receive a debt-collection demand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the claim is still incorrect, object to the debt-collection demand as well. Do not assume that your first email to the business automatically follows the claim through every stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if Kronofogden contacts me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRespond within the time stated in the letter and object directly to Kronofogden if the claim is incorrect. A prior objection to the business does not replace this step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. Your rights depend on the agreement, the type of purchase or service and the facts of the individual case.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48167733068118,"sku":"7350139912686","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/invoice-dispute-private-consumer-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791245448"},{"product_id":"dispute-of-invoice-template-private-person-copy","title":"Invoice Dispute – Business (B2B) | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Business (B2B)\u003c\/strong\u003e is an English-first template package governed by Swedish law for companies that need to object to an invoice or other commercial payment claim. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Sale of Goods Act, Interest Act, Debt Collection Act, limitation rules, current Finansinspektionen debt-collection regulations and the Swedish Enforcement Authority's payment-order procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Business English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary B2B objection template under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Business English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step B2B guidance covering contract review, interest, collection and Kronofogden.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensmall – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual companies and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensguide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eB2B disputes are contract-driven\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBetween businesses, the contract, framework agreement, purchase order, accepted quotation and incorporated standard terms are often decisive. Swedish consumer legislation normally does not apply between two businesses. For sales of movable goods, the Swedish Sale of Goods Act may apply, but it is non-mandatory and can be displaced by agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe package can be used where a business disputes all or part of an invoice because, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eno valid order or agreement exists,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe invoice differs from the contract, quotation, PO or agreed price list,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003egoods or services were not delivered or performed as agreed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003egoods are defective or non-conforming and a complaint has been made,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003equantity, hours, unit price, VAT, rebate or another calculation is incorrect,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe invoice is a duplicate or has already been paid,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ea credit note, return, price reduction or other agreed adjustment is missing,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe company relies on a counterclaim or set-off, subject to the applicable legal requirements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003einterest, collection costs or late-payment compensation are disputed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA dispute does not automatically invalidate the invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA written objection documents the debtor company's position and the factual and contractual basis for the objection. It does not itself determine whether the creditor's claim is legally valid. If the parties cannot agree, the dispute may need to be determined by a court or, where agreed, through arbitration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFull or partial objection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template separates the total invoiced amount, the disputed amount and any undisputed amount. If only part of the invoice is disputed, the company should consider handling the undisputed part in accordance with the contract while clearly reserving its position regarding the remainder.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGoods, services and the contract chain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor B2B sales of movable goods, the Sale of Goods Act can apply unless the agreement provides otherwise. The Act gives the buyer remedies for delay and defects and may permit the buyer to withhold a corresponding part of the payment. Because the Act is non-mandatory, the agreed terms, acceptance procedure, complaint periods and liability clauses must always be checked first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor B2B services there is no single general Swedish statute equivalent to the Consumer Services Act. Contracts, industry terms and general contract-law principles therefore often carry greater weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003e30-day B2B payment rule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Interest Act contains special commercial-payment rules. A claim for payment for goods or services between businesses is due no later than 30 days after the creditor has demanded payment unless the creditor expressly approved a longer payment period. This rule concerns when payment may be required; it does not prevent a debtor from disputing a claim that is contractually or factually incorrect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDefault interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a due date was fixed in advance, statutory default interest can normally run from that date. Where the statutory rate applies, it is the current reference rate plus eight percentage points. Contractual interest provisions may affect the result and should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSEK 450 late-payment compensation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhere the statutory conditions are met in a commercial claim for goods or services, a business creditor may also be entitled to \u003cstrong\u003eSEK 450 in late-payment compensation\u003c\/strong\u003e. If that compensation applies, separate reminder and collection-cost compensation is generally recoverable only to the extent that the combined compensation exceeds SEK 450. The new template therefore has a separate option for disputing additional charges rather than treating them as automatically valid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt collection and current FI rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the claim is sent to debt collection, do not ignore the new demand. Send the objection to the collection company as well and attach the earlier dispute and relevant supporting material. Finansinspektionen's regulations and general guidance \u003cstrong\u003eFFFS 2025:2\u003c\/strong\u003e have applied since 1 July 2025. Where a debtor has a factually grounded objection, the collection company should investigate the matter, obtain the creditor's position and inform the debtor of the result.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eKronofogden – particularly important for companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company receives an order for payment from Kronofogden, it must object directly to Kronofogden within the time stated in the notice. A previous objection to the supplier or debt-collection company does \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e replace this step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor companies and other legal entities, the application itself can also have credit-reporting consequences. The company should therefore have procedures for identifying and responding to incorrect payment-order applications immediately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSet-off and counterclaims\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains an option to state that a counterclaim or set-off is relied upon, but this should only be used after verifying that the legal and contractual conditions for set-off are actually met. Complex or substantial counterclaims should normally be reviewed by legal counsel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLimitation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe general Swedish limitation period is normally ten years for ordinary B2B claims, but limitation can be interrupted and special rules may apply. Do not state that a claim is time-barred without checking the full payment and correspondence history.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDispute-resolution clauses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck whether the agreement directs disputes to an ordinary Swedish court or to arbitration. Arbitration may involve substantial costs and can materially affect strategy. International contracts can also contain foreign governing-law or jurisdiction clauses that change the analysis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish counterparties, boards, accounting functions and advisers. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law invoice-dispute template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bestridande-faktura-foretag\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See Bestridande av faktura – Företag →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the contract chain, partial objections, B2B payment terms, default interest, late-payment compensation, current debt-collection rules, Kronofogden, set-off, limitation, arbitration and when legal advice should be obtained.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes disputing an invoice automatically make it invalid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It documents that the company rejects all or part of the claim and why. The underlying contractual dispute still has to be resolved between the parties or ultimately determined through the agreed dispute-resolution process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Swedish consumer law apply between two companies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNormally not. B2B disputes are primarily governed by the agreement, applicable commercial legislation and general contract-law principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we dispute only part of the invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Clearly identify the disputed amount and the basis for the objection. Any undisputed part should be handled separately under the contract.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if the invoice has gone to debt collection?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eObject to the collection company as well and attach the earlier objection. A factually grounded dispute should be investigated under current debt-collection practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if Kronofogden contacts the company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRespond directly within the time stated in the notice. A prior objection to the supplier or collection company does not replace an objection to Kronofogden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. High-value claims, arbitration, set-off, international contracts or pending proceedings may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48167782613334,"sku":"7350139912693","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/invoice-dispute-business-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791246324"},{"product_id":"control-balance-sheet-template-engelska-swedish-law","title":"Kontrollbalansräkning – engelsk Excel\/PDF + svensk referens + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKontrollbalansräkning – Engelskspråkig Excel-mall enligt svensk rätt\u003c\/strong\u003e för svenska aktiebolag som behöver bedöma kapitalbrist enligt 25 kap. aktiebolagslagen. Paketet innehåller en automatiserad engelsk Excel-arbetsbok, en svensk referensarbetsbok, utskriftsvänliga PDF-versioner och detaljerade användargestuider på båda språken.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJuridiskt och redovisningsmässigt granskad: 6 oktober 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eGranskad mot 25 kap. aktiebolagslagen, aktuell BFN-vägledning för kontrollbalansräkningar, K2\/K3-principer och gällande svenska skatteregler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVad ingår?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelsk kontrollbalansräkning – Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eAutomatiserad arbetsbok med indata, justeringar, kapitaltest, kontroller och styrelseunderskrifter.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelsk utskriftsvänlig PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStatisk utskrift för dokumentation och manuell ifyllnad.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referens-Excel + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMatchande svenska referensversioner för styrelser, revisorer och rådgivare.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelska + svenska användarguider\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eDetaljerade Word\/PDF-guider som täcker den juridiska processen, värderingsjusteringar och vanliga misstag.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eEn kontrollbalansräkning är inte ett insolvenstest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet lagstadgade kravet avser \u003cstrong\u003ekapitalbrist\u003c\/strong\u003e. Styrelsen ska genast upprätta en kontrollbalansräkning när det finns skäl att anta att det egna kapitalet, beräknat enligt 25 kap. 14 §, understiger hälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet, eller när lagens särskilda tvingande skäl för upprättande föreligger. Insolvens och oförmåga att betala skulder är separata juridiska frågor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAutomatiserade juridiska tröskelvärden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExcel-arbetsboken beräknar och visar:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eeget kapital enligt kontrollbalansräkningen,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edet fulla registrerade aktiekapitalet,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evarning för kapitalstatus,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evägledning för datum för andra kontrollstämma när datum för första kontrollstämma har angetts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epåminnelser om revisorsstatus.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHälften av aktiekapitalet vs fullt aktiekapital\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm kontrollbalansräkningen visar att det egna kapitalet understiger hälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet måste styrelsen snarast kalla till en första kontrollstämma för att pröva frågan om likvidation. Om den första kontrollstämman inte visar att det \u003cstrong\u003efulla registrerade aktiekapitalet\u003c\/strong\u003e har återställts och beslut om likvidation inte fattas, måste en andra kontrollstämma i regel hållas inom åtta månader. Det är alltså inte tillräckligt att bara återställa kapitalet till hälften-nivån innan den andra stämman.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eByggd för justeringar enligt 25 kap. 14 §\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eArbetsboken separerar ordinarie bokförda värden från kontrollbalansjusteringar och tillhandahåller dedikerade dokumentationsfält. Den stödjer:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etillåtna justeringar av tillgångsvärden där det stöds av god redovisningssed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enettoförsäljningsvärde där lagstadgade förutsättningar är uppfyllda,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etillåtna reduceringar av avsättningar eller skulder,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparat dokumentation av varje justering,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003euppdelning av obeskattade reserver i en kapitaldel och uppskjuten skatteskuld.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eObeskattade reserver och skatteberäkning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eArbetsboken fördelar automatiskt obeskattade reserver med hjälp av en skattesats-input. Den är förinställd på \u003cstrong\u003e20,6 %\u003c\/strong\u003e, vilket är den nuvarande svenska bolagsskattesatsen, men inputfältet är redigerbart då den faktiska skatteeffekten alltid bör verifieras för bolaget och den specifika balansposten.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eK2 och K3\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBFN anger att ett mindre företag kan använda K3 istället för K2 vid upprättande av kontrollbalansräkning. Ett större företag får inte använda K2, och K2 och K3 bör inte blandas i samma kontrollbalansräkning. Arbetsboken innehåller därför ett tydligt val för K2\/K3-ramverk och användarguiden förklarar skillnaden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRevisors- och styrelseunderskrifter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm bolaget har revisor granskar denne kontrollbalansräkningen. Själva kontrollbalansräkningen måste undertecknas av styrelsen. Arbetsboken innehåller ett fält för revisorsstatus och ett separat blad för styrelseunderskrifter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRisk för personligt betalningsansvar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnderlåtenhet att följa den lagstadgade processen för kontrollbalansräkning kan leda till personligt betalningsansvar för bolagets förpliktelser som uppstår under perioden av bristande efterlevnad. Paketet betonar därför datum, dokumentation, styrelseprocessen samt skillnaden mellan första och andra kontrollstämma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eArbetsbokens struktur\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSTART\u003c\/strong\u003e – bolagsuppgifter, aktiekapital, datum, K2\/K3, revisorsstatus och skattesats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eJUSTERINGAR\u003c\/strong\u003e – ordinarie bokförda värden, tillåtna KBR-justeringar och stödjande dokumentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKONTROLLBALANS\u003c\/strong\u003e – automatiserad balans och kapitalberäkning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKONTROLLER\u003c\/strong\u003e – formelbaserade varningar och rimlighetskontroller.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUNDERSKRIFTER\u003c\/strong\u003e – dedikerad sida för styrelsens underskrifter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEngelska + svenska i ett paket\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDen engelska arbetsboken är den primära versionen i denna produkt. Den svenska arbetsboken ingår som referens för svenska styrelser, redovisningskonsulter, revisorer och rådgivare. Detta är en \u003cstrong\u003eengelskspråkig mall styrd av svensk rätt\u003c\/strong\u003e, inte en utländsk balansräkningsmall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kontrollbalansrakning-mall-utan-revisor\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFöredrar du ett svenskspråkigt paket för ett bolag utan revisor? Se Kontrollbalansräkning utan revisor →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kontrollbalansrakning-mall-med-revisor\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHar bolaget revisor? Se det svenskspråkiga paketet med revisorsarbetsflöde →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eViktig omfattning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePaketet är utformat för vanliga icke-finansiella svenska aktiebolag. Finansiella företag och bolag som omfattas av branschspecifika kapital- eller redovisningsregler kan kräva annan hantering. Värdeuppskrivningar av tillgångar, tvistiga fordringar, komplexa skatteeffekter, koncernstrukturer eller osäkerhet kring personligt betalningsansvar bör granskas av en kvalificerad redovisningskonsult, revisor eller jurist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFilformat och leverans\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, PDF, DOCX och ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpråk:\u003c\/strong\u003e Engelska och svenska.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAntal filer:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLeverans:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital nedladdning. Ingen fysisk produkt skickas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVanliga frågor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNär måste en kontrollbalansräkning upprättas?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eGenast när styrelsen har skäl att anta att det egna kapitalet, beräknat enligt lagens regler för kontrollbalansräkning, understiger hälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet, eller när det särskilda tvingande skälet i lagen är uppfyllt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eÄr en kontrollbalansräkning ett insolvenstest?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. Kapitalbrist och insolvens är olika juridiska frågor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMåste en revisor granska den?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm bolaget har en revisor granskar denne kontrollbalansräkningen. Arbetsboken kan även användas av bolag utan revisor, men bolagets faktiska revisorsstatus måste verifieras.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBehöver hälften av aktiekapitalet återställas inom åtta månader?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. Om processen fortsätter till en andra kontrollstämma är den relevanta återställningsnivån det \u003cstrong\u003efulla registrerade aktiekapitalet\u003c\/strong\u003e, inte bara hälften.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKan K2 och K3 blandas?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. BFN:s vägledning anger att ramverken inte bör blandas i samma kontrollbalansräkning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eDetta paket är ett beräknings- och dokumentationsstöd enligt svensk rätt och ersätter inte individuell rådgivning gällande redovisning, revision eller juridik.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48168039350614,"sku":"7350139912709","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/control-balance-sheet-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791247302"},{"product_id":"korjournal-mall-gratis-word-excel-pdf","title":"Mileage log – Excel\/Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVehicle Logbook – complete template package for Swedish tax and vehicle documentation\u003c\/strong\u003e including Swedish Excel, Word, and PDF templates, an English language version, and detailed user guides. The package is designed based on the information recommended by the Swedish Tax Agency (Skatteverket) for a vehicle logbook and is suitable for companies, employers, drivers, and private individuals who need to distinguish between business and private driving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTax reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Tax Agency's current guidance on vehicle logbooks, company car benefits, business travel, and tax-free car allowances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish vehicle logbook – Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eAutomatic trip length, business\/private, mileage allowance, control totals, and annual overview.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish vehicle logbook – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly manual vehicle logbook.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVehicle Logbook – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish Excel, Word, and PDF version compliant with Swedish tax rules.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish + English user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eDesigned according to the Swedish Tax Agency's recommended information\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency recommends, among other things, that a vehicle logbook should contain the odometer reading at the beginning and end of the year, registration number, current year, date and odometer reading at the start and end of each trip, kilometers driven, start and end address, business\/purpose, and which locations, companies, or contact persons were visited during business trips. Notes on the driver and refueling may also be relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNew automatic Excel model\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel version is significantly more advanced than the previous template and includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSTART\u003c\/strong\u003e – registration number, year, vehicle model, odometer reading, and vehicle category.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVEHICLE LOGBOOK\u003c\/strong\u003e – 500 trip rows with automatic trip length calculation and breakdown between business and private.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSUMMARY\u003c\/strong\u003e – business kilometers, private kilometers, miles (mil), calculated car allowance, and reconciliation against odometer readings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efields for road\/bridge\/ferry tolls, parking, fuel\/charging, and notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etracking of private usage occasions and private mileage,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eindicator for 30,000 km of business driving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMinor private use of employer-provided car\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor private use of an employer-provided car to fall within the limit of \"minor extent,\" \u003cstrong\u003eboth\u003c\/strong\u003e of the following conditions must be met during the calendar year:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea maximum of 10 private usage occasions, and\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea maximum of 100 Swedish miles (1,000 km) of private driving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTravel between home and the regular place of work is generally counted as private travel. Therefore, the Excel template includes a separate field for private kilometers and a sequence number field for private usage occasions as a practical control tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003e3,000 Swedish miles (30,000 km) in business\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf an employee drives at least 3,000 Swedish miles (30,000 km) for business purposes during an income year with their company car, the employer may, under certain conditions, reduce the taxable benefit value by 25 percent. The vehicle logbook is an essential piece of documentation to prove the extent of business driving. The Excel template therefore displays a special indicator when 30,000 business kilometers are reached.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTax-free car allowance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the 2026 income year, the Swedish Tax Agency's flat rates are:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eprivate car:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 SEK per mil (10 km),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ecompany car not fully electric:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 SEK per mil (10 km),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003efully electric company car:\u003c\/strong\u003e 9.50 SEK per mil (10 km).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel template converts kilometers to \"mil\" and uses the selected vehicle category. The amounts are included as a control\/calculation aid and should be updated when the Swedish Tax Agency changes the flat rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eParking, congestion tax, and other fees\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eParking is not automatically included in the standard mileage allowance. Road, bridge, and ferry tolls, as well as congestion taxes, may also have separate tax treatments. Therefore, the new logbook has specific columns for such costs instead of mixing them with the kilometer allowance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFuel benefit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the employer pays for fuel for a company car, the vehicle logbook is particularly important for allocating private and business-related driving. If sufficient documentation is lacking, the tax consequences can be significantly worse. Therefore, the template also includes optional fields for refueling or charging.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWord and PDF for manual use\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who do not want to keep a logbook directly in Excel, a clean, print-friendly Word\/PDF version is included, featuring vehicle details, odometer readings, and trip rows. This can be used on paper and subsequently compiled in Excel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version for use under Swedish tax rules\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is intended for Swedish companies and drivers who work in English and is not a foreign tax logbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/vehicle-logbook-template-english\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you need an English-first product page? See Vehicle Logbook Template →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant to know\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA vehicle logbook is a form of documentation and evidence. It does not automatically guarantee specific tax exemptions, deduction rights, or benefit treatments. The assessment is affected by, among other things, the actual purpose of the trip, the employee's regular place of work, the type of vehicle used, and who paid for fuel and other expenses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a vehicle logbook have to be electronic?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Tax Agency states that a vehicle logbook can be kept on paper, on a computer, or electronically. The important thing is that the documentation is sufficiently detailed and reliable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough to just write down the number of kilometers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as strong evidence. The Swedish Tax Agency recommends significantly more information, including date, odometer reading, addresses, purpose, and visited locations or companies for business trips.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs travel between home and work considered a business trip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally not. Travel between home and the regular place of work is counted as private travel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Excel template calculate mileage allowance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It calculates a control amount based on business kilometers and the selected vehicle category using the included 2026 flat rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the same template for a company car and a private car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but the tax assessment differs between a private car and a company car. Therefore, choose the correct vehicle category and use the guide to understand the difference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation and calculation aid and does not replace individual tax, payroll, or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48168312078678,"sku":"7350139912716","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/korjournal-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791248033"},{"product_id":"vehicle-logbook-template-english","title":"Fordonets körjournal – engelsk XLSX\/DOCX\/PDF + svensk referens + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVehicle Logbook – English-first template package under Swedish tax rules\u003c\/strong\u003e for companies, employees and individuals who need a structured way to document business and private vehicle use. The package includes an automated English Excel workbook, English Word\/PDF versions, a Swedish reference set and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTax and documentation review: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against current Swedish Tax Agency guidance on vehicle logbooks, car benefits, business travel and the 2026 mileage-allowance rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Vehicle Logbook – Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eAutomated workbook with trip calculations, business\/private split and annual summary.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Vehicle Logbook – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrintable manual versions for paper or digital completion.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on Swedish tax documentation and mileage rules.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference set – XLSX\/DOCX\/PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMatching Swedish reference versions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish-language guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA vehicle logbook is evidence – not an automatic tax guarantee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA logbook helps document how a vehicle has actually been used. Swedish tax treatment depends on the facts, including whether the trip was genuinely made for work, what the regular place of work is, who paid the fuel and how the vehicle was provided. The template is therefore designed as structured evidence and review support rather than a promise of a particular tax outcome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInformation the workbook records\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate and driver,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness or private classification,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness purpose \/ errand,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer, company, place or contact visited,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003estart and end address,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eodometer at start and end,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatically calculated trip distance,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness and private kilometres,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eroad, bridge and ferry costs,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eparking,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efuel or charging quantity and cost,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprivate-use occasion number,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enotes and supporting context.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAutomated Excel calculations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel workbook contains dedicated \u003cstrong\u003eSTART\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eLOGBOOK\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eSUMMARY\u003c\/strong\u003e sheets. It automatically calculates trip distance from odometer readings, separates business and private kilometres and summarises the annual totals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe annual summary also compares the logged trips with the vehicle's opening and closing odometer readings so that unexplained differences can be identified and investigated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBusiness travel and private travel\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTrips genuinely made in the course of work are recorded as business trips. Travel between home and the regular place of work is normally treated as private travel. The workbook therefore keeps business and private kilometres separate rather than treating every work-related day as business mileage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLimited private use of an employer-provided car\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhere the question is whether private use remains within the Swedish limited-use threshold, \u003cstrong\u003eboth conditions\u003c\/strong\u003e must be met: no more than 10 private-use occasions and no more than 100 Swedish mil (1,000 km) of private driving during the calendar year. The workbook includes separate fields and summary indicators for both measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExtensive business driving\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe summary also contains an indicator for 3,000 Swedish mil (30,000 km) of business driving during the income year, since extensive business use of a benefit car can affect the taxable car-benefit value when the legal conditions are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003e2026 mileage rates built into the workbook\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook currently uses the Swedish Tax Agency's 2026 rates:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOwn car:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 25 per Swedish mil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eBenefit car that is not fully electric:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 12 per Swedish mil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFully electric benefit car:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 9.50 per Swedish mil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel model converts kilometres to Swedish mil and applies the selected vehicle category. These figures are clearly presented as editable year-specific inputs because the rates may change in later years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eParking, road charges and similar costs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eParking and road, bridge or ferry charges are kept in separate columns. They should not simply be added to the mileage rate because separate tax and reimbursement rules may apply. Congestion tax and employer-paid fuel can also require separate treatment depending on the circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOne English-first package, with Swedish reference\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English workbook and documents are the primary versions in this product. The Swedish versions are included as references for Swedish finance teams, advisers, employees and authorities. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language template for Swedish tax documentation\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law mileage logbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/korjournal-mall-gratis-word-excel-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish Körjournal product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain when a vehicle logbook is useful, which data should be recorded, the distinction between business and private trips, limited private use, extensive business driving, mileage rates, Excel workflow, year-end reconciliation and common documentation mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a logbook legally required in every case?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A logbook is primarily important as evidence and documentation. In many car-benefit and business-travel situations it is the clearest way to substantiate how the vehicle has actually been used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre trips between home and the regular workplace business trips?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally no. They are generally treated as private travel for car-benefit and mileage documentation purposes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the 10-occasion and 100-mil limits?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThey are the two cumulative thresholds relevant to limited private use of an employer-provided car. Both must be satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Excel file calculate mileage automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It calculates each trip from the start and end odometer readings and provides business\/private totals and an annual reconciliation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the mileage rates change?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The rates in the workbook are the Swedish values for income year 2026 and should be checked for later years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a documentation and calculation aid for Swedish tax use and does not replace individual tax, payroll or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48168733344086,"sku":"7350139912723","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/vehicle-logbook-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791248707"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-att-foretrada-aktiebolag-mall","title":"Power of attorney to represent a limited company – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney to represent a limited company\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete template package under Swedish law for companies wishing to grant an individual the right to represent the company in clearly defined business, regulatory, banking, or contractual matters. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Companies Act's regulations on the board of directors, the CEO, and authorized signatories, as well as the power of attorney regulations under the Contracts Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Power of Attorney – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable master template for Swedish limited companies.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Power of Attorney – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA power of attorney is not the same as registered signatory authority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board of directors represents the company and signs for it in accordance with the Companies Act. The CEO may represent the company within the scope of day-to-day management, and the board may appoint a special authorized signatory. This product is instead a \u003cstrong\u003estandard contractual power of attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e for defined tasks. It does not automatically register the proxy holder as a special authorized signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRegistered signatory authority and a standard power of attorney follow different rules. For registered signatory authority, a provision stating that two or more persons must sign jointly can be registered, whereas other limitations – such as internal monetary limits – are not registered as limitations on the right to sign. If a monetary limit or other restriction is intended to define the agent's external authority, it should therefore be clearly stated in the power of attorney itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho should sign on behalf of the company?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney must be signed by the person or persons who have the right to bind the company in the situation in question. Therefore, the template contains specific fields for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eregistered signatory authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboard resolutions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCEO authority within day-to-day management,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother documented basis for authority.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company is signed for by two or more persons jointly, the power of attorney must be signed in the corresponding authorized manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template can cover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can select and specify, among other things:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enegotiation, execution, amendment, and termination of agreements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eorders and purchases with monetary limits,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacts with authorities and public bodies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer and supplier receivables, payment plans, and disputes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking and payment matters where the bank accepts the power of attorney,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal estate, premises, or tenant-owner apartment matters,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edisputes and agent management when a separate litigation power of attorney is not required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother specifically stated assignments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMonetary limits and internal restrictions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes separate fields for monetary limit per legal act, total financial framework, requirement for countersignature, geographical\/operational scope, and other restrictions. Important limitations should appear directly in the power of attorney shown to third parties, not only in internal instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBoard resolutions and the responsibility of corporate bodies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA power of attorney does not transfer the board's statutory responsibility to the proxy holder. If the underlying business requires a board or general meeting resolution, that decision must still be made. The package therefore includes a \u003cstrong\u003evoluntary annex for documentation of board resolutions\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBanks and authorities may require their own forms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA recipient may set their own formatting and identification requirements. For example, banks may require the bank's own power of attorney form or additional authority verification. The power of attorney does not grant the proxy holder the right to use anyone else's personal BankID, PIN code, security token, or similar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal property – special requirement for writing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the power of attorney is to be used for agreements regarding the purchase, exchange, or gift of real property, the authority must be in writing according to Section 27 of the Contracts Act. The template therefore contains specific fields for property designation, legal act, price range, and other terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitution and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can explicitly prohibit sub-delegation or allow it only for a specific assignment. The template also contains a specific limitation for agreements where the proxy holder themselves, a related party, or a related company has a conflicting economic interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney can be valid until further notice, for a specific period, or only for a specific assignment. The guide explains how written powers of attorney should be recovered or destroyed upon revocation and when third parties should be notified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies working with international counterparties or using English as their corporate or working language.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/generalfullmakt-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you need a general power of attorney for an individual\/company? See General Power of Attorney →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers the difference between a standard power of attorney and signatory authority, who should sign, authority and capacity, board resolutions, bank\/authority requirements, real estate power of attorney, revocation, and a complete checklist before signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the proxy holder become a registered authorized signatory?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A standard power of attorney does not automatically register the proxy holder as a special authorized signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the CEO sign the power of attorney?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the assignment. The CEO has the statutory right to represent the company within day-to-day management, but larger or unusual measures may require a board resolution or other authorized signature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general rule for a standard company power of attorney. However, the recipient may set their own formal requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the proxy holder buy or sell real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can be covered if the authority is clearly and explicitly stated in writing and the company's internal decisions have been properly made. Real estate matters may also require additional documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. Major transactions, real estate deals, financing, corporate acquisitions, international agreements, or questions regarding the authority of corporate bodies should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48169315729750,"sku":"7350139912730","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/fullmakt-aktiebolag-hero-2027.png?v=1791252728"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-att-foretrada-bolag-mall-engelska","title":"Power of Attorney to Represent a Company (English) – Swedish Law","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney for a Swedish Limited Company\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first template package governed by Swedish law for companies that need to authorise a person to represent the company in clearly defined business, contractual, banking, authority or property matters. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Companies Act rules on board representation, the managing director and special signatories, together with the Swedish Contracts Act rules on powers of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template for a Swedish limited company.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on authority, company signatory rules, board resolutions and revocation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for boards, counterparties and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA power of attorney is not the same as registered company signatory authority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the Swedish Companies Act, the board represents the company and signs for it. The managing director may represent the company within the scope of day-to-day management, and the board may appoint one or more special signatories. This product is instead an \u003cstrong\u003eordinary contractual power of attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e for defined assignments. It does not automatically register the attorney as a special signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho should sign for the company?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney must be issued by the person or persons who are authorised to bind the company in the relevant matter. The template therefore contains dedicated fields for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eregistered company-signatory authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea board resolution,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe managing director's authority within day-to-day management,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eanother documented basis of authority.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company's registered signatory rule requires two or more persons acting jointly, the power of attorney should be signed accordingly. The Swedish Companies Registration Office also states that powers of attorney submitted to it are generally signed by the company's authorised signatories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can the template cover?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe authority can be selected and tailored for matters such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enegotiating, entering into, changing and terminating contracts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eorders and purchases subject to monetary limits,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacts with Swedish authorities and public bodies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer and supplier claims, payment plans and invoice disputes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking and payment matters where the bank accepts the power of attorney,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal-estate, premises or tenant-owned apartment matters,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edisputes and representative matters where a separate procedural authority is not required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother specifically identified assignments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMonetary limits and restrictions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate fields for a maximum amount per transaction, total authority cap, co-signing requirement, geographic\/business scope and other limitations. Important restrictions should be stated directly in the instrument shown to the counterparty and not only in internal instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBoard decisions and corporate responsibility\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA power of attorney does not transfer the board's statutory responsibilities to the attorney. If the underlying transaction requires a board or shareholders' meeting decision, that corporate decision must still be taken. The package therefore contains an \u003cstrong\u003eoptional appendix for documenting the relevant board resolution\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBanks and authorities may require their own forms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA receiving organisation can impose its own identity and form requirements. A bank may require its own power-of-attorney form or additional authority checks. The instrument does not authorise the attorney to use another person's personal BankID, PIN, security token or other personal authentication credentials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal property – written authority required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 27 of the Swedish Contracts Act, authority to enter into an agreement for the purchase, exchange or gift of real property must be in writing. The template therefore includes dedicated fields for the property, type of transaction, price limits and other conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitution and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe company can prohibit the attorney from appointing a substitute or permit substitution only for a specified assignment. The template also contains a restriction for transactions where the attorney, a related person or a related company has a conflicting financial interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe authority may apply indefinitely, for a specified period or only for a defined assignment. The guides explain the Swedish Contracts Act revocation framework, including why a written instrument held by the attorney should normally be recovered or destroyed when revoked and why relevant counterparties may need to be notified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory requirement that an ordinary company power of attorney be witnessed. The receiving bank, authority or other counterparty may nevertheless impose its own requirements. Optional witness fields can therefore be used when appropriate without presenting witnessing as universally required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish document is included as a reference for Swedish boards, counterparties, banks and advisers. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law corporate power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/fullmakt-att-foretrada-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first product? See Fullmakt att företräda aktiebolag →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the difference between an ordinary power of attorney and registered signatory authority, who should sign, authority versus internal instructions, board approvals, banking and authority requirements, real-property powers, revocation and a practical pre-signing checklist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the attorney become a registered company signatory?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. An ordinary power of attorney does not automatically register the attorney as a special signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the managing director issue the power of attorney?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the assignment. A managing director has statutory authority within day-to-day management, while major or unusual transactions may require a board decision or another authorised signatory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general rule for an ordinary company power of attorney. The receiving organisation may impose its own requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the attorney buy or sell real property for the company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat can be authorised where the power is stated clearly and in writing and the company's internal corporate approvals are in place. Additional property-registration documents may also be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. Major transactions, financing, property deals, company acquisitions, international arrangements or uncertainty about corporate authority should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48169425273174,"sku":"7350139912747","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/power-of-attorney-company-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791251499"},{"product_id":"testamente-mall-juridiskt-bindande","title":"Will Template – Legally Binding Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete template package for those who wish to document how their estate should be distributed in accordance with Swedish law. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word and PDF, an English language version under Swedish law, and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers, among other things, the Swedish Inheritance Code's rules on testamentary capacity, formal requirements, witnesses, statutory share (laglott), revocation, service of the will, and estate executors, as well as relevant rules on separate property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTestamente – svenska DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable main template for an individual will.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTestamente – svenska PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill – Swedish law DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill – Swedish law PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly English language version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk användarguide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance with a witness checklist and practical examples.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for use under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: the template does not automatically become a valid will\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eValidity depends on more than just the content. An ordinary Swedish will must be drawn up in accordance with the formal requirements of the Inheritance Code: it must be in writing, the testator must sign the document or acknowledge their signature in the presence of two simultaneously present witnesses, and the witnesses must then sign. The witnesses must know that the document is a will, but they do not need to know its content.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is therefore a \u003cstrong\u003egeneral documentation aid\u003c\/strong\u003e. It provides clear fields and instructions but cannot guarantee validity in an individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the will template helps you regulate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe main template is modular, allowing you to use the sections that fit your situation. It includes, among other things:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etestator identity details and family overview,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprovisions for specific assets or monetary amounts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edistribution of the remaining estate in shares,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ealternative beneficiaries if a beneficiary passes away before the testator,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eoptional clauses regarding separate property,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe ability to specify how returns on and property substituting for the inheritance should be treated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evoluntary appointment of an estate executor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eadditional instructions and special conditions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate signature and witness section with space for two witnesses,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eoptional note on where the original is stored.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFormal requirements – execute the witnessing correctly\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe two witnesses to the will must be present at the same time when the testator signs or confirms their signature. The witnesses must then sign. Witness eligibility is important: certain next-of-kin and persons who benefit from the will may not witness the relevant disposition, and there are also age and suitability requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide includes a specific witness checklist. This template is intended for an ordinary written will; special rules regarding emergency wills are not treated as the primary method in the package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStatutory share (laglott) – important if you have children\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the Inheritance Code, children and other forced heirs have a right to a \"laglott\" (statutory share), which corresponds to half of the inheritance they would have received without a will. A testamentary provision that infringes upon the statutory share is not necessarily automatically invalid, but a forced heir may request an adjustment. This right must normally be asserted within six months from the service of the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template and guide therefore help the user address the issue of the statutory share, but complex family situations should be assessed individually.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpouses, cohabitants, and children from previous relationships\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe order of inheritance differs depending on family circumstances. A surviving spouse may have far-reaching inheritance rights, whereas a cohabitant (sambo) has no general legal inheritance right after their partner. Children from previous relationships (särkullbarn) can also affect how the inheritance is distributed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is a broad, individual will template. In cases involving children from previous relationships, large asset values, companies, foreign real estate, or special inheritance planning, a more specialized template or individual legal advice may be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeparate property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe will can be used to stipulate that property received by a beneficiary shall be their separate property. The package also distinguishes between the property itself, property that replaces it, and its returns, as these issues are not always treated identically without express conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEstate executor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is an optional clause for an estate executor. According to the Inheritance Code, an estate executor can be commissioned to manage the administration of the estate and carry out the will. The role entails significant responsibility and should not be appointed casually.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAmending or revoking the will\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA will can be revoked. An addendum or an amendment intended to function as a new testamentary provision normally needs to meet the formal requirements of a will. The guide recommends clear version control and ensuring that old originals are not left behind in a way that creates uncertainty regarding the testator's last will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter the death – service of the will and deadlines\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide provides an overview of how the will is handled after death, including service of the will to heirs, forced heirs' ability to request an adjustment to the statutory share, and the deadline for filing a claim of invalidity. The will or a certified copy must also be handled in connection with the estate inventory (bouppteckning) when a will exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDecided rule change from January 1, 2027\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor legal entities that acquire agricultural property through a will, extended requirements for acquisition permits under the land acquisition legislation apply from January 1, 2027. This is a special issue mainly relevant when the beneficiary is, for example, a company, an association, or another legal entity, and the estate includes agricultural property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProposal for a will registry and digital wills\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is a government inquiry proposal regarding, among other things, a voluntary public will registry and digital wills. As of the date of the legal review, this is not currently applicable law. The package is therefore based on the rules that are actually in effect and does not rely on a future registry or digital will existing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish is the main version. The English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be practical when the testator, family members, or advisors work in English. It should not be perceived as a British, American, or universal international will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/testamente-engelska-will-swedish-law\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you want the English version as the main product? See Will – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides go through how each main section is filled out and explain, among other things, formal requirements, selection of witnesses, statutory share, separate property, estate executors, revocation, storage, and what should be done after a death. They also contain examples, common mistakes, and situations where a lawyer should be consulted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen the template is suitable – and when you should seek help\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is primarily suitable for private individuals who want to draw up an individual will according to Swedish law and who want a structured foundation with clear choices and instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal advice is particularly appropriate in cases of international connections, large or complicated assets, companies or generational shifts, agricultural or forestry properties, complex issues involving children from previous relationships, coordination with previous wills, suspicion of future disputes, or questions regarding the testator's capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust an ordinary will be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, an ordinary written will must follow the Inheritance Code's witness formalities. Two eligible witnesses must be simultaneously present when the testator signs or confirms their signature, and the witnesses must sign the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the witnesses read the will?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They must know that the document is a will, but they do not need to know the content.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I disinherit my children from their statutory share (laglott)?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eForced heirs have a right to a statutory share. A will can contain a provision that affects the statutory share, but the forced heir may request an adjustment to receive their share within the statutory deadline.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes my cohabitant (sambo) inherit automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, cohabitants do not have general legal inheritance rights after one another. A will is therefore often particularly relevant for cohabitants, but the Cohabitation Act's (sambolagen) rules on property division may simultaneously affect the financial situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the English version in Sweden?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is designed as a language version under Swedish law. In cases of international connections or foreign assets, choice of law and international inheritance law should be reviewed specifically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. A will must both be correctly designed for the specific situation and drawn up with the applicable formal requirements.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48176646947158,"sku":"7350139912785","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/testamente-hero-2027.png?v=1791253762"},{"product_id":"testamente-engelska-will-swedish-law","title":"Will Template (English) – Swedish Law","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first document package for an individual who wants to record how their estate should be distributed under Swedish succession law. The package includes an English Word\/PDF will template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers Swedish rules on testamentary capacity, execution formalities, witnesses, forced share (laglott), revocation, service and challenges, executors and relevant separate-property provisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill – Swedish law DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWill – Swedish law PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on execution, witnesses, forced share and post-death handling.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference will – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for family members, advisers and Swedish authorities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: the template does not automatically create a valid will\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eValidity depends on both the contents and how the document is executed. As a main rule under the Swedish Inheritance Code, a will must be in writing. The testator must sign it, or acknowledge an existing signature, in the simultaneous presence of two eligible witnesses. The witnesses then sign the instrument. They must know that the document is a will, but they do not need to know its contents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis package is therefore a \u003cstrong\u003egeneral documentation aid\u003c\/strong\u003e. It provides structured clauses and execution guidance but cannot guarantee validity in an individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English primary template is modular and includes sections for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe testator's identity and family\/inheritance overview,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003especific gifts of assets or fixed amounts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epercentage distribution of the residue of the estate,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esubstitute beneficiaries if a beneficiary dies before the testator,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eoptional separate-property clauses for beneficiaries,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etreatment of replacement property and income where appropriate,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eoptional appointment of an executor (testamentsexekutor),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eadditional testamentary instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea dedicated signing and witness section for two witnesses,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ean optional record of where the original will is stored.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish execution formalities\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe two witnesses must be simultaneously present when the testator signs the will or acknowledges the signature. Witness eligibility is important. Certain relatives and persons who benefit from the will cannot validly witness the relevant disposition, and Swedish law also contains age and capacity requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included guide contains a dedicated witness checklist. This package is designed for an ordinary written will and does not present emergency-will rules as the normal method of execution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eForced share (laglott)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDescendants are protected by Swedish forced-share rules. A descendant's forced share is one half of the statutory inheritance share. A provision that interferes with that protection is not simply ignored automatically: a descendant generally needs to request adjustment of the will within the statutory period after service in order to obtain the forced share.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore highlights the issue rather than promising that a chosen distribution can always be implemented exactly as written.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpouse, cohabitant and children from earlier relationships\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish succession results differ depending on family circumstances. A surviving spouse may have substantial statutory inheritance rights, while a cohabitant does not have a general statutory right to inherit the other cohabitant. Children from an earlier relationship can also materially affect the outcome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a broad individual-will template. More specialised drafting or individual advice can be appropriate where there are children from earlier relationships, complex family arrangements, business assets, substantial wealth or advanced successive-inheritance planning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeparate property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains an optional clause allowing inherited property to be made the beneficiary's separate property under Swedish matrimonial-property rules. The package also distinguishes the original inherited property from replacement property and income, because those issues may require express drafting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExecutor (testamentsexekutor)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn optional executor clause is included. Under Swedish law, an executor appointed in a will may be given substantial authority in the administration of the estate. The appointment should therefore be made deliberately rather than added automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRevoking or changing the will\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA will can be revoked. A later amendment that is intended to operate as a new testamentary disposition generally needs to satisfy the applicable testamentary formalities. The guide recommends clear version control and careful handling of earlier originals so that there is no unnecessary uncertainty about the testator's final intentions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter death: service and important time limits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains, at a general level, the Swedish rules on service of the will on heirs, the descendant's forced-share adjustment period and the time limit for challenging a will. It also explains that a will must be dealt with in connection with the estate inventory (bouppteckning) when one exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInternational situations require extra care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. The use of English does not make it a UK, US or universal international will. If the testator lives abroad, has another nationality, owns foreign assets or otherwise has cross-border connections, applicable-law and jurisdiction questions may arise under international succession rules. Individual legal review is recommended in those situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRule entering into force on 1 January 2027\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSweden has adopted an amendment extending acquisition-permit requirements under the Agricultural Land Acquisition Act to acquisitions of agricultural property by legal persons through testamentary dispositions. This special issue becomes relevant if a company, association, foundation or other legal person is intended to receive Swedish agricultural property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProposals that are not current law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA Swedish government inquiry has proposed, among other things, a voluntary public will register and a secure system for digital wills. As of the legal review date, that legislative process remains ongoing. This package does not treat those proposals as current Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish first – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish family members, advisers and authorities. Both versions are structured around Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/testamente-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first product? See Testamente – Word\/PDF + English + användarguide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English guide explains what the document is, when the template is suitable, execution formalities, how each section should be completed, common mistakes, forced share, witnesses, storage, post-death handling and when professional advice should be obtained. A corresponding Swedish reference guide is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen this template is suitable – and when to seek advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package is mainly intended for an individual who wants a structured English-language will governed by Swedish law and a Swedish reference version in the same delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal advice is particularly appropriate for cross-border estates, foreign residence or citizenship, foreign assets, major business interests, agricultural property, complex children-from-earlier-relationships situations, earlier mutual wills, major gifts, tax questions in another country, concerns about testamentary capacity or a foreseeable dispute.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this a UK or US will?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an English-language template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the witnesses need to read the will?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They must know that the document is a will, but they do not need to know its contents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I exclude my children completely?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish descendants have forced-share protection. How a will interacts with those rights depends on the circumstances and on whether the descendant requests adjustment within the applicable statutory period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a cohabitant inherit automatically in Sweden?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A cohabitant does not have a general statutory inheritance right after the other cohabitant. Other property-law and estate rules can still affect the overall financial outcome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the template if I have foreign assets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document can be a starting point, but cross-border estates can raise applicable-law, jurisdiction, registration and tax questions that should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. A will must be appropriate for the testator's circumstances and executed in accordance with applicable formal requirements.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48176681386326,"sku":"7350139912778","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/will-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791254574"},{"product_id":"gemensamt-testamente-mall-word-pdf","title":"Joint will – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint \/ mutual will under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for two people who wish to combine their testamentary provisions in a single document. The package is Swedish-first and also includes an English reference version as well as detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers, among other things, formal requirements, statutory shares (laglott), mutual wills, revocation and amendment, divorce\/separation, secondary inheritance, executors, and relevant rules regarding separate property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint will – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish master template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint will – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide on template choices, witnesses, statutory shares, and amendments.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish reference guide for the same Swedish legal structure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: a joint will is not automatically “locked”\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product text has been corrected. Swedish law does not imply that a mutual will generally becomes completely irrevocable after the first death. A will can be revoked, and a promise not to revoke is not binding. However, a unilateral revocation or amendment of a mutual will may have specific consequences if it substantially disrupts the conditions for the mutual provisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore clearly distinguishes between what can be provided for, what may need to be interpreted, and what should be reviewed individually.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is a joint or mutual will?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTwo people can write their testamentary provisions in the same document. When the provisions are based on the parties giving each other equivalent or related rights, the term \u003cstrong\u003emutual will\u003c\/strong\u003e (inbördes testamente) is often used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt remains each testator’s own provision that is legally assessed. The fact that two people sign the same document does not in itself mean that all parts automatically become irrevocable or that the survivor is always free to dispose of the property in a certain way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTwo main options: limited right of disposal or full ownership\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA key improvement in the new template is that the user must choose between two legally distinct constructions rather than mixing them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLimited right of disposal with secondary inheritance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis option is intended for situations where the surviving spouse should be able to use, sell, and consume the property during their lifetime, while the property remaining from the first deceased should be able to pass to final beneficiaries after the survivor's death.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFull ownership\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis gives the survivor a stronger right of ownership. If the first deceased simultaneously wants to ensure that specific property or a certain value passes to specific persons after the survivor's death, greater caution is required. The template therefore explicitly warns against choosing full ownership while assuming that a secondary inheritance is automatically protected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStatutory shares and heirs (laglott)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHeirs (bröstarvingar) are protected by the statutory share (laglott). The statutory share is half of the inheritance the child would otherwise have been entitled to by law. A will that encroaches on the statutory share does not automatically become entirely void. An heir usually needs to claim adjustment within six months of being served with the will to receive their statutory share.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTherefore, the template contains specific fields for each testator's children and a clear warning regarding children from previous relationships (särkullbarn).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpouses, cohabitants, and children from previous relationships\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe outcome can differ significantly depending on the relationship:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMarried:\u003c\/strong\u003e a surviving spouse has a legal right of inheritance in many situations, but children from previous relationships and other rules may affect the outcome.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCohabitants (sambor):\u003c\/strong\u003e a cohabitant has no general legal right of inheritance after their partner. A will can therefore be particularly important.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChildren from previous relationships:\u003c\/strong\u003e can normally receive their inheritance from their parent immediately upon that parent's death and also have statutory share protection.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn cases of children from previous relationships and more advanced planning, individual legal review is recommended before signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFormal requirements must be met\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a main rule, a will must be in writing. The testator must sign or acknowledge their signature in the presence of two qualified witnesses who are simultaneously present. The witnesses must sign and be aware that the document is a will, but they do not need to know its content.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the joint document, the practical main solution in the template is for both testators to sign or acknowledge their signatures in the presence of the same two qualified witnesses, simultaneously present.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho cannot be a witness to a will?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Inheritance Code contains several witness disqualifications. Among others, the testator's spouse or cohabitant, certain close relatives, and certain persons with a personal or related interest in the provisions may not witness in the way prohibited by law. The guide contains a specific witness checklist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal beneficiaries and substitutes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a table for how property that is to pass on after the last survivor's death according to the will should be distributed. It is also possible to specify what should happen if a beneficiary dies before the right to inherit enters into force.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe shares should be checked so that they total 100 percent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeparate property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is an optional clause stating that an inheritance a final beneficiary receives through the will shall be the beneficiary's separate property. The template also distinguishes between the property itself, substitute property, and yield, as yield does not automatically acquire the same character unless specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTestamentary executor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is an optional section for a testamentary executor. Such a person can have a significant role in the administration of the estate and should therefore be appointed consciously, not routinely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRevocation and amendments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach testator's provision is subject to the rules on revocation and amendment of wills. A codicil must in principle meet the same formal requirements as a will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor mutual wills, there is also a special rule: if someone, through unilateral revocation or amendment, substantially disturbs the conditions for the mutual provisions, that person may lose their right under the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDivorce and separation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA provision for a spouse is void if the marriage is dissolved at the time of the testator's death or if divorce proceedings are ongoing. A provision for a cohabitant is void if the cohabitation relationship has ended before the testator's death.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe will should therefore always be reviewed in the event of separation, filing for divorce, new marriage or cohabitation, new children, or major changes in finances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter the death\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide also covers the serving of the will, six-month deadlines for, among other things, statutory share adjustment and challenges, as well as handling in connection with the estate inventory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language reference governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not a British, American, or general international will template. In cases of foreign residence, citizenship, real estate, or other foreign assets, international inheritance law may need to be analyzed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/gemensamt-testamente-mall-engelska-joint-will-template\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you prefer the English version as your main product? See Joint Will Template – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecial 2027 rule on agricultural property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs of January 1, 2027, the requirement for an acquisition permit is extended to legal entities' acquisition of Swedish agricultural property through a will. This issue becomes relevant if, for example, a company, association, or foundation is to be the final beneficiary of such property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProposals not treated as current law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSOU 2025:91 contains, among other things, proposals for a voluntary state will register, digital wills, and strengthened protection for surviving cohabitants. As of the legal review on October 6, 2026, the legislative process is still ongoing. The package is therefore based on current rules, not on the proposals as if they were already law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen the template is suitable – and when a lawyer should be hired\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is primarily intended for spouses and cohabitants who wish to document a relatively clear mutual arrangement according to Swedish law. Individual advice is particularly appropriate in cases of children from previous relationships, large business assets, agricultural property, complicated secondary inheritances, previous mutual wills, large gifts, foreign assets or residence, and foreseeable disputes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish master version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a joint will automatically binding and irrevocable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Wills are subject to revocation rules. A mutual will can simultaneously have specific legal effects if a unilateral amendment substantially disturbs the mutual arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the survivor always inherit everything?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Statutory shares, children from previous relationships, division of matrimonial property, debts, and other rules can limit what can be transferred through the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs full ownership the same thing as a limited right of disposal?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The two options provide different legal standing and must not be used as if they were synonyms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo cohabitants automatically inherit from each other?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Cohabitants have no general legal right of inheritance after each other under Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo both testators need two witnesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach testamentary provision must meet the formal requirements. In this joint document, the setup is therefore designed for both testators to sign or acknowledge their signatures before the same two qualified witnesses who are simultaneously present.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe package is a general documentation aid according to Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. A will must fit the parties' actual family and property conditions and be executed according to current formal requirements.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48176724410710,"sku":"7350139912754","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/gemensamt-testamente-hero-2027.png?v=1791255552"},{"product_id":"gemensamt-testamente-mall-engelska-joint-will-template","title":"Inbördes testamente – svensk rätt | engelskt Word\/PDF + svensk referens + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint \/ Mutual Will under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first document package for two people who want to place coordinated testamentary dispositions in one instrument. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers Swedish execution formalities, witnesses, forced share, reciprocal wills, revocation and amendment, separation\/divorce, successive inheritance, executors and relevant separate-property rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint \/ Mutual Will – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint \/ Mutual Will – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on the choices in the template, witnesses, forced share and later changes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference will – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for family members, advisers and Swedish authorities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: a joint or mutual will is not automatically irrevocable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product text has been corrected. Under Swedish law, a will can be revoked, and a promise not to revoke a will is not binding. A mutual or reciprocal will can nevertheless have special consequences if one person unilaterally revokes or changes their disposition in a way that materially disturbs the basis of the reciprocal arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore does not promise that the document becomes permanently “locked” after the first death.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat does “joint” or “mutual” will mean in Sweden?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTwo people may place their testamentary dispositions in one document. Where the dispositions are reciprocal or interdependent, Swedish legal terminology commonly refers to an \u003cem\u003einbördes testamente\u003c\/em\u003e. Each person's disposition is still assessed as a testamentary act. Using a single document does not by itself make every provision irrevocable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoose one of two different structures on the first death\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template makes the user choose between two legally different models instead of combining them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFree disposal with successive inheritance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis structure is intended for situations where the Survivor should be able to use, sell and consume property during life, while remaining property derived from the first deceased may later pass to final beneficiaries under an effective successive-inheritance arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFull ownership\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFull ownership normally gives the Survivor a stronger ownership position. If the first deceased also wants specific final beneficiaries to be protected after the Survivor's death, the drafting needs greater care. The template therefore warns against selecting full ownership while assuming that a later successive inheritance is automatically preserved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eForced share (laglott)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish descendants have forced-share protection. The forced share is one half of the statutory inheritance share. A will that interferes with the forced share is not automatically wholly ineffective: a descendant generally needs to request adjustment within the statutory period after formal service of the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate fields for each Testator's descendants and highlights children from earlier relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarried couples, cohabitants and children from earlier relationships\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMarried couples:\u003c\/strong\u003e a surviving spouse has statutory inheritance rights in many situations, but children from earlier relationships and other rules can materially affect the result.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCohabitants:\u003c\/strong\u003e a cohabitant does not have a general statutory inheritance right after the other cohabitant under Swedish law.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChildren from earlier relationships:\u003c\/strong\u003e can normally have immediate inheritance rights after their parent and are also protected by forced-share rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal review is recommended when the intention is to maximise the Survivor's position in a family with children from earlier relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish execution formalities\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a main rule, a will must be in writing. The Testator must sign it or acknowledge an existing signature in the simultaneous presence of two eligible witnesses. The witnesses then sign the instrument and must know that it is a will, although they do not need to know its contents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the joint instrument in this package, the practical execution model is for both Testators to sign or acknowledge their signatures before the same two eligible witnesses while the witnesses are simultaneously present.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitness eligibility\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish law contains several witness disqualifications, including restrictions affecting the Testator's spouse or cohabitant, close relatives and certain persons who themselves or through close relatives benefit from the disposition. The included guide contains a dedicated witness checklist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal beneficiaries and substitutes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a table for final distribution after the last death and options for what should happen if a named final beneficiary dies before entitlement arises. Percentage shares should be checked so that they total 100%.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeparate property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn optional clause allows property received by a final beneficiary to be designated as that beneficiary's separate property under Swedish matrimonial-property rules. The package also distinguishes the inherited property from replacement property and income because those issues can require express drafting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExecutor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn optional executor clause is included. An executor appointed in a will may have a significant role in the administration of the estate, so the appointment should be made deliberately rather than added automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRevocation and later amendments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach Testator's disposition remains subject to Swedish revocation rules. Testamentary amendments and additions must generally comply with the applicable testamentary formalities. In a reciprocal will, a unilateral change that materially disturbs the basis of the mutual arrangement may also affect the changing party's rights under the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeparation and divorce\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA testamentary provision to a spouse is ineffective if the marriage has ended when the Testator dies or divorce proceedings are then pending. A provision to a cohabitant is ineffective if the cohabitation has ended before death. The will should therefore be reviewed after separation, divorce proceedings, a new marriage or cohabitation, new children or major asset changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter death\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe user guide explains the Swedish rules on service of the will, six-month periods that can apply to forced-share adjustment and challenges, and handling of the will in connection with the estate inventory (bouppteckning).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference. Both versions are structured around Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US joint will template.\u003c\/strong\u003e If either Testator lives abroad, has another nationality, owns foreign assets or otherwise has cross-border connections, applicable-law, jurisdiction, registration and tax questions may need separate analysis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/gemensamt-testamente-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Gemensamt testamente – Word\/PDF + English + guide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRule entering into force on 1 January 2027\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSweden has adopted an amendment extending acquisition-permit requirements under the Agricultural Land Acquisition Act to acquisitions of Swedish agricultural property by legal persons through testamentary dispositions. This special issue becomes relevant if a company, association, foundation or other legal person is intended to receive such property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProposals that are not current law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSOU 2025:91 proposes, among other things, a voluntary public will register, secure digital wills and strengthened protection for surviving cohabitants. As of the legal review date, the legislative process remains ongoing. This package therefore does not treat those proposals as current Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen this template is suitable – and when to seek advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package is mainly intended for married couples or cohabitants who want a structured reciprocal arrangement under Swedish law and prefer the working documents in English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual advice is particularly appropriate for children from earlier relationships, significant business interests, agricultural property, advanced successive-inheritance arrangements, earlier mutual wills, substantial gifts, cross-border estates, foreign assets or residence, concerns about testamentary capacity, or a foreseeable dispute.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 18 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a joint will automatically irrevocable after the first death?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Swedish law contains revocation rules. Reciprocal wills can nevertheless create special consequences if a unilateral change materially disturbs the basis of the reciprocal arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs full ownership the same as free disposal?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They give the Survivor different legal positions and should not be treated as interchangeable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Survivor always inherit everything?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Forced-share rights, children from earlier relationships, property division, debts and other mandatory rules can affect what can pass under the will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo cohabitants inherit each other automatically in Sweden?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Cohabitants do not have a general statutory inheritance right after each other under Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo both Testators need witnesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach testamentary disposition must satisfy the statutory formalities. In the joint instrument, the package is structured for both Testators to sign or acknowledge their signatures before the same two eligible witnesses who are simultaneously present.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. A will must be appropriate for the Testators' actual family and asset circumstances and executed in accordance with applicable formal requirements.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48176779919702,"sku":"7350139912761","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/joint-will-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791256277"},{"product_id":"bostadshyresavtal-mall-word-pdf","title":"Residential Lease Agreement Template – Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential lease agreement under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated document package for residential leasing. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference version governed by Swedish law, and detailed user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe package is updated with the new Private Rental Act (2026:772), which entered into force on July 1, 2026, as well as current rules in Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential lease agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable main Swedish template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential lease agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains choice of law, rent, termination, permits, deposits, and security of tenure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant from July 1, 2026: two different frameworks\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous product version was primarily based on Chapter 12 of the Land Code. Since July 1, 2026, there is a new \u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Rental Act (2026:772)\u003c\/strong\u003e for certain rentals of one's own home. Which framework applies affects, among other things, rent setting, termination, security of tenure, and when the agreement can be terminated prematurely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore contains a specific choice-of-law section that must be completed before the agreement is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does Chapter 12 of the Land Code apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 12 of the Land Code – often called the Tenancy Act – is still the central regulatory framework for many residential tenancy relationships. It applies, for example, to standard primary leasing, subleasing of a rental apartment, and situations where the Private Rental Act is not applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rules are largely mandatory for the tenant's benefit. A contractual term may therefore be void even if both parties have signed it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen can the Private Rental Act (2026:772) apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new law generally applies when a natural person or an estate grants, for compensation, a house or part of a house that is to be used wholly or to a not insignificant extent as a dwelling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHowever, the law does not apply when, among other things, the landlord holds the home under a rental contract, for holiday rentals, or when the landlord regularly rents out more than two apartments that do not constitute part of their own home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older Act (2012:978) on the Rental of Private Homes was repealed on July 1, 2026, but still applies to agreements concluded under that act before its entry into force.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent – different rules depending on the form of rental\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard subleasing according to Chapter 12 of the Land Code\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor subleasing, there are specific rules regarding reasonable rent. For a rental apartment, the rent may normally not exceed the primary rent plus permitted surcharges. Surcharges for furniture and other equipment may, according to current rules, not exceed 15 percent of the rent the landlord pays themselves, and surcharges for other utilities may not exceed actual costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePrivate Rental Act from July 1, 2026\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor new agreements covered by the Private Rental Act (2026:772), the rent must be agreed upon as a specific amount. Separate charges for, for example, electricity, hot water, and water can be agreed upon based on actual consumption costs. Upon request, the Rent Tribunal may review the rent and lower it when the conditions of the law are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older cost-based model according to the 2012 Private Rental Act should therefore not be used routinely for new agreements after July 1, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLease period and termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate options for open-ended and fixed-term agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Rental Act:\u003c\/strong\u003e a fixed-term agreement normally ends at the end of the rental period. The tenant may always terminate the agreement to the turn of a month occurring at least three months after the notice. For open-ended agreements, the law also provides for three months' notice to the turn of a month.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChapter 12 of the Land Code:\u003c\/strong\u003e the main rule for residential rent is also three months' notice to the turn of a month for open-ended agreements, but the rules for fixed-term agreements and different situations must be assessed according to the Tenancy Act.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSecurity of tenure differs between the frameworks. Agreements covered by the new Private Rental Act do not have the same security of tenure as residential leases under Chapter 12 of the Land Code. In standard subleasing, however, security of tenure may arise, normally after more than two years in succession. A waiver of security of tenure should be handled with the correct separate document and, when the rules require it, be reviewed by the Rent Tribunal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePermit for subleasing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the person sub-letting holds the property under a rental contract, the landlord's consent or permission from the Rent Tribunal is normally required for subleasing. For cooperative apartments (bostadsrätt), the consent of the cooperative housing association or permission from the Rent Tribunal is normally required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the agreement is signed before the permit is in place, it should be made explicitly conditional upon the necessary permit being obtained. The template contains such an option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent payment – different time limits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor residential leases under Chapter 12 of the Land Code, payment delays of more than one week after the due date can constitute grounds for forfeiture. According to the Private Rental Act (2026:772), a delay of more than two weeks is instead stated as grounds for the landlord's right to terminate the agreement prematurely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis does not mean that eviction happens automatically when the time limit is exceeded. Rules regarding notifications, correction, recovery, and procedure must be considered where they are applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDeposit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a clear deposit section for amount, payment date, what the deposit may be used for, and how the refund is to be handled. A deposit should not be described as an extra fee or automatically fall to the landlord at the end of the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInspection, inventory, and condition\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document has space for move-in inspection, inventory list, number of keys, and documented defects. Photo and attachment documentation is recommended as it can reduce the risk of later disputes regarding damages and normal wear and tear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTenant's duty of care and damages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement distinguishes between normal wear and tear and damages for which the tenant is responsible. The landlord's statutory obligations cannot generally be transferred to the tenant via a standard clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLandlord's access\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe landlord does not have an unlimited right to enter the home. The template refers to the legal situations where access may be required, for example, supervision or necessary work, and does not contain any general \"free access\" clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePets, smoking, and house rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are optional fields for pets, smoking, and specific house rules. Such terms must still be compatible with mandatory law, association rules, and the circumstances of the individual tenancy relationship.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides the option to specify requirements for home insurance and liability for various insurance policies. The parties should check with their insurance companies that the rental is covered by the correct insurance protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language reference governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not a British or American lease agreement. The Swedish version is the master version in this product package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bostadshyresavtal-mall-engelska-residential-lease-agreement-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you like the English version as the main product? See Residential Lease Agreement – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSeek individual advice in cases of uncertainty regarding which framework applies, very long-term leases, multiple rented properties, block leasing, corporate leasing, disputes about reasonable rent, waiver of security of tenure, forfeiture\/eviction, or more complex ownership and usufruct relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 17 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Private Rental Act always apply when a private individual rents out property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The scope of the act has several limitations. For example, renting out a home that the landlord themselves holds under a rental contract falls outside the scope of the act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I set any rent I want?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Tenancy rules differ between the frameworks, and the rent can be subject to review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need a permit to sublet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOften yes. Rental contracts and cooperative apartments have different permit rules. Check that the correct consent or permit is in place before the rental begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the subtenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on which framework applies and how long the tenancy has lasted. Therefore, security of tenure should not be handled with a general standard wording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that the agreement is valid in every situation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The template is a general documentation support. Applicable law, mandatory rules, permits, and the actual circumstances must be correct in the individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation support under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. The agreement must be adapted to the correct form of rental and the parties' actual circumstances.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178621874518,"sku":"7350139912792","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/bostadshyresavtal-hero-2027.png?v=1791257609"},{"product_id":"bostadshyresavtal-mall-engelska-residential-lease-agreement-word-pdf","title":"Residential Lease Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential Lease Agreement governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first document package for residential letting in Sweden. The package includes an editable English Word\/PDF agreement, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated for the new Swedish Private Letting Act (Privatuthyrningslag 2026:772), in force since 1 July 2026, and for current Chapter 12 Land Code rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential Lease Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential Lease Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains legal regime, rent, notice, consent, deposit and security of tenure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference agreement – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for landlords, tenants, advisers and authorities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant from 1 July 2026: two separate Swedish regimes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older version of this product mainly referred to Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code. Since 1 July 2026, Sweden also has a new \u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Letting Act (Privatuthyrningslag 2026:772)\u003c\/strong\u003e for certain residential lettings by natural persons and estates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe applicable regime affects rent, notice, security of tenure and early termination. The template therefore begins with a dedicated legal-regime selection block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 12 of the Land Code – often called the Swedish Tenancy Act or \u003cem\u003ehyreslagen\u003c\/em\u003e – remains the principal framework for many residential tenancies. Typical examples include first-hand residential letting, subletting of a tenancy and arrangements that fall outside the Private Letting Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMany provisions are mandatory in favour of the tenant. A contractual clause can therefore be ineffective even if both parties have signed it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen can the Private Letting Act (2026:772) apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new Act generally applies where a natural person or an estate lets a house or part of a house for residential use against payment, subject to the statutory exclusions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt does not apply, among other situations, where the landlord holds the dwelling under a tenancy, where the letting is for holiday purposes, or where the landlord regularly lets more than two dwellings that are not part of the landlord's own home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe former 2012 Act on private letting was repealed on 1 July 2026 but continues to govern agreements entered into under that Act before the new legislation took effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent – the correct rule depends on the letting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSubletting under Chapter 12\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor a sublet tenancy, rent is generally limited by the rent paid by the primary tenant plus permitted additions. For furniture and equipment, the permitted addition may not exceed 15% of the primary rent, while charges for other included utilities may not exceed the landlord's actual cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePrivate Letting Act from 1 July 2026\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor agreements governed by the new Private Letting Act, rent is agreed as a fixed amount. Separate charges for items such as electricity, hot water or water can be based on actual consumption costs. The Swedish Rent Tribunal may review and reduce the rent where the statutory conditions are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe former cost-based formula under the repealed 2012 Act should therefore not automatically be used for new agreements entered after 1 July 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTerm and notice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate options for indefinite and fixed-term leases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Letting Act:\u003c\/strong\u003e a fixed-term agreement normally ends at the agreed end date. A tenant may always give notice to a month-end occurring at the earliest three months after notice. For indefinite agreements, the statutory framework also uses a three-month notice period to month-end.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChapter 12 Land Code:\u003c\/strong\u003e the main rule for an indefinite residential tenancy is also three months to a month-end, while fixed-term agreements are subject to the Land Code's specific rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSecurity of tenure differs between the regimes. Agreements governed by the new Private Letting Act do not provide the same security of tenure as ordinary residential tenancy under Chapter 12. In ordinary subletting, security of tenure may arise, commonly after more than two consecutive years. Any waiver should be handled using the correct separate procedure and, where required, with the Rent Tribunal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConsent and permission for subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the person letting the dwelling is a tenant, subletting normally requires the primary landlord's consent or permission from the Rent Tribunal. For a condominium, the owner normally needs the condominium association's consent or permission from the Rent Tribunal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the lease is signed before approval has been obtained, the agreement should clearly state that it is conditional upon the required consent or permission. The template includes this option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate payment – different statutory thresholds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 12 of the Land Code, residential rent that remains unpaid for more than one week after the due date may constitute a ground for forfeiture. Under the Private Letting Act, more than two weeks' delay is identified as a ground for the landlord to terminate the agreement early.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis does not mean that eviction follows automatically. Statutory notice, cure, reinstatement and procedural rules may still have to be followed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDeposit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement includes a structured deposit section for amount, payment date, permitted deductions and repayment. A deposit should not be treated as an automatic additional fee or automatically retained at the end of the tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition report, inventory and evidence\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes fields for move-in inspection, inventory, keys, meter readings and known defects. Photo documentation and signed attachments are recommended to reduce later disputes about damage and normal wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTenant care obligations and damage\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement distinguishes ordinary wear from damage for which the tenant may be responsible. Statutory landlord duties cannot simply be transferred to the tenant through a generic clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLandlord access\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe landlord does not have unrestricted access to the dwelling. The template refers only to circumstances in which access is permitted under Swedish law and the agreement, for example necessary inspection or urgent work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOccupants, pets, smoking and house rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOptional fields are included for occupants, pets, smoking and additional house rules. Such terms still need to comply with mandatory law, condominium or property rules and the circumstances of the particular tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement allows the parties to record insurance responsibilities and whether the tenant should maintain home insurance. Both parties should confirm that their insurance actually covers the relevant letting arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English agreement is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference. Both versions are structured around Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US residential lease.\u003c\/strong\u003e English terminology is used to make the document easier to work with internationally, but the legal framework is Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bostadshyresavtal-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Bostadshyresavtal – Word\/PDF + English + användarguide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal review is recommended if the applicable regime is uncertain, for long-term letting, multiple rented dwellings, block letting, corporate landlords or tenants, a dispute about rent, waiver of security of tenure, forfeiture\/eviction, or more complex ownership and occupancy arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 22 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Private Letting Act always apply when a private person lets a home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Act has several statutory exclusions. For example, it does not apply when the landlord themselves holds the dwelling under a tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the landlord charge any rent they want?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The applicable rent rules depend on the legal regime, and rent may be subject to review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs permission required for subletting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOften yes. Tenancies and condominiums have different consent rules. Check that the correct approval has been obtained before the letting begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a subtenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat depends on which statutory regime applies and how long the tenancy has continued. Security of tenure should therefore not be handled with a generic waiver clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that every lease will be valid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a general documentation aid. The correct legal regime, mandatory rules, required permissions and the actual circumstances of the letting must be assessed in each case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid governed by Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. The agreement must be adapted to the correct type of letting and the parties' actual circumstances.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178723389782,"sku":"7350139912808","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/residential-lease-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791265584"},{"product_id":"lokalhyresavtal-mall-word-pdf","title":"Commercial lease agreement – Word\/PDF + English + user guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated document package for leasing office, retail, warehouse, and other business premises. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and detailed user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe package is reviewed against current regulations in Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code regarding commercial leasing, including lease terms, rent\/index, assignment, subletting, forfeiture, indirect security of tenure, changes to terms, mediation, and compensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish main template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains lease terms, indexation, VAT, security of tenure, and termination.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat counts as business premises?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the Swedish Land Code, premises are defined as any unit not intended to be used, in whole or to a non-negligible extent, as a residence. This includes, for example, offices, shops, warehouses, workshops, studios, or other business premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial leasing differs from residential leasing in several important respects. The template is therefore specially designed for commercial\/business tenancies and should not be used as a residential lease agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLease term and termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides separate options for open-ended and fixed-term agreements. For premises leased indefinitely, the legal default rule is that the agreement must be terminated to end at the turn of the month occurring closest to nine months after the notice of termination, unless a longer notice period has been agreed upon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEven fixed-term commercial agreements that have lasted longer than nine months must, as a general rule, be terminated to expire. The parties should therefore carefully fill in the lease term, notice period, and any renewal period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent and indexation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe base rent is stated as a fixed amount. For fixed-term commercial agreements lasting at least three years, the parties may use a different basis for calculating rent, such as a correctly drafted index clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore distinguishes between the base rent and an optional index component. The index clause should not be used mechanically in shorter agreements where the statutory requirements for such a basis of calculation are not met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT on commercial rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, the leasing of real estate is exempt from VAT. Under certain conditions, the landlord may opt for voluntary tax liability for business premises and charge VAT on the rent. The template therefore includes a separate option for VAT rather than automatically adding VAT to all commercial rents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties should verify the current VAT treatment before signing the agreement, especially when the premises are used for mixed or VAT-exempt activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePermitted use of the premises\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement includes a specific field for the exact permitted business activity. The tenant may not, without further ado, use the premises for a purpose substantially different from the agreed one. In long-term tenancies, the Rent Tribunal may, under certain conditions, permit a change of use, but this does not replace the need for a clear contract clause from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMaintenance, installations, and restoration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template distinguishes between the landlord's and the tenant's responsibility for, for example, surface finishes, installations, maintenance, repairs, and regulatory requirements. For business premises, a clear allocation of responsibility is particularly important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChanges, installations, signage, and other alterations should require written approval where relevant. The agreement also contains a separate section regarding restoration upon the end of the tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFire safety and regulatory requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document includes a specific section on systematic fire protection work and responsibility for the regulatory requirements resulting from the agreed business activity. The allocation of responsibility should be adapted to the specific premises and operations rather than being assumed to be identical in every commercial lease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment and subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tenant may not freely assign the lease or sublet the premises. The rules differ between various situations, including when a business is assigned together with the premises. The agreement therefore requires necessary consent or permission and avoids general wording that could give a misleading impression of free assignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent payment and forfeiture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor commercial premises, a delay in rent payment of more than two working days after the due date may constitute grounds for forfeiture under Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code. This does not mean that eviction happens automatically. Statutory notifications, rules regarding rectification and \"recovery,\" and proper procedures may still need to be followed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn certain situations, the commercial tenant can recover the leasehold by paying within two weeks of the prescribed notification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eIndirect security of tenure – important after nine months\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA commercial tenant does not normally have the right to force an extension in the same way as a residential tenant. Instead, \u003cstrong\u003eindirect security of tenure\u003c\/strong\u003e may arise once the tenancy has lasted longer than nine months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAmong other things, this may grant a right to financial compensation if the landlord refuses to extend the lease or demands unreasonable terms and no statutory exemption applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA waiver of indirect security of tenure should not be hidden in the lease agreement itself. It must be made in a \u003cstrong\u003eseparate document\u003c\/strong\u003e, and approval from the Rent Tribunal is required in many situations. Therefore, the package refers to the correct separate HN3\/HN5 procedure rather than including a simplified waiver clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompensation in case of wrongful termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen a commercial tenant is entitled to compensation under the rules of indirect security of tenure, the statutory minimum is an amount equivalent to one year's rent according to the terminated agreement. In addition, further reasonable compensation for economic loss may apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarket rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn a dispute over extension terms, the market rent of the premises is assessed, primarily based on rents for comparable premises in the area. An index clause or previous rent therefore does not guarantee that a future term will always be considered reasonable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTermination for moving out or changing terms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial leasing has strict rules regarding termination. If the landlord terminates the agreement, the notice must, in relevant cases, state the terms required for an extension or why an extension is being refused, and inform the tenant that they must refer the dispute to the Rent Tribunal within two months to protect their rights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEven a commercial tenant terminating an agreement for a change in terms must phrase the notice correctly and may need to apply for mediation within two months. A procedural error can have significant consequences.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity, deposit, and guarantee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate options for a deposit, bank guarantee, and other security. The amount, validity period, what the security may be used for, and the conditions for its return should be expressly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can specify requirements for business, property, and liability insurance, as well as who is responsible for the building's insurance. Insurance requirements should be adapted to the operations actually conducted in the premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language reference governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not a British or American commercial lease agreement. The Swedish version is the main version in this product package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/lokalhyresavtal-mall-engelska-commercial-lease-agreement\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you like the English version as the main product? See Commercial Lease Agreement – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is especially appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal or tax advice is particularly appropriate for long-term or financially significant tenancies, major adaptation investments, complicated index clauses, turnover-based rent, voluntary VAT, waivers of security of tenure, business transfers, environmental or regulatory requirements, forfeiture, termination, or changes to terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 13 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a commercial tenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, after more than nine months, the commercial tenant can normally obtain indirect security of tenure. This protection primarily means a possibility for compensation and mediation, not a general right to always have the agreement extended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan security of tenure be waived directly in the lease agreement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA waiver must be made in a separate document. Rent Tribunal approval is often required, although there are specific situations where the law allows for a waiver without approval.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rent be indexed every year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA basis other than a fixed rent amount can be used under the statutory conditions, including for fixed-term commercial agreements of at least three years. The clause must be correctly drafted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould VAT always be added to commercial rent?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Leasing of real estate is normally VAT-exempt, but voluntary tax liability can be used if the conditions are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that all commercial tenancies will be legally correct?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a general documentation aid. The use of the premises, the result of negotiations, mandatory regulations, tax\/VAT, and the actual circumstances must be assessed in each individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal or tax advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178825658710,"sku":"7350139912815","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/lokalhyresavtal-hero-2027.png?v=1791266815"},{"product_id":"lokalhyresavtal-mall-engelska-commercial-lease-agreement","title":"Commercial Lease Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first document package for offices, shops, warehouses and other business premises in Sweden. The package includes an editable English Word\/PDF agreement, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against current Chapter 12 Swedish Land Code rules on commercial premises, including term and notice, rent\/indexation, assignment\/subletting, forfeiture, indirect security of tenure, change-of-terms notices, mediation and compensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eGuidance on notice, CPI\/indexation, VAT, security of tenure and formal termination steps.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference lease – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for landlords, tenants, advisers and authorities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat counts as commercial premises under Swedish law?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code, commercial premises are premises that are not let wholly or to a material extent for residential use. This can include offices, shops, warehouses, workshops, studios and other business premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial leases differ materially from residential tenancies. This package is therefore specifically structured for business premises and should not be used as a residential lease agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTerm and notice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes separate choices for indefinite and fixed-term leases. For an indefinite commercial lease, the statutory default notice period is generally nine months to the relevant lease end point unless a longer period has been agreed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA fixed-term lease for commercial premises that has lasted longer than nine consecutive months generally also requires notice in order to end. The lease term, notice period and any renewal cycle should therefore be completed carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent and CPI\/indexation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBase rent is entered as a fixed amount. For a fixed-term commercial lease with a term of at least three years, the parties may use another calculation basis for the rent, such as a properly drafted CPI\/indexation clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore separates base rent from optional indexation. CPI indexation should not be inserted mechanically in shorter leases where the statutory conditions for an alternative calculation basis are not satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT on commercial rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLetting real property is normally exempt from Swedish VAT. Voluntary VAT taxation can, however, be used for qualifying commercial premises when the statutory conditions are met. The agreement therefore contains a separate VAT choice rather than automatically adding VAT to every commercial lease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties should verify the actual VAT treatment before signing, especially where the premises are used for mixed, exempt or changing business activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePermitted use of the premises\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement contains a dedicated field for the permitted business\/use. A tenant may not simply use the premises for a materially different purpose than agreed. In some long-running leases, the Rent Tribunal may permit a change of use where the statutory conditions are met, but this does not remove the need for a clear use clause in the original agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMaintenance, alterations and reinstatement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template separates landlord and tenant responsibilities for surfaces, installations, servicing, repairs and business-specific requirements. Clear allocation is especially important for commercial premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAlterations, installations, signage and structural changes can be made subject to written approval. The agreement also includes a separate reinstatement section for the end of the tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFire safety, permits and regulatory compliance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package includes fields for systematic fire-safety allocation and responsibilities arising from the tenant's specific business. The correct allocation depends on the building and the activity carried out in the premises and should therefore be documented rather than assumed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment and subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA commercial tenant does not have an unrestricted right to assign the lease or sublet the premises. Swedish law distinguishes between different situations, including transfer of a business together with the lease. The agreement therefore requires the consent or permission that is legally necessary instead of suggesting that transfer or subletting is automatically permitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent and forfeiture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor commercial premises, rent remaining unpaid for more than two business days after the due date can constitute a statutory ground for forfeiture under Chapter 12 of the Land Code. This does not mean eviction occurs automatically. Statutory notice, cure, reinstatement and procedural requirements can still apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn qualifying cases, a commercial tenant may reinstate the tenancy by paying within two weeks after the prescribed statutory notice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eIndirect security of tenure after more than nine months\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA commercial tenant generally gains \u003cstrong\u003eindirect security of tenure\u003c\/strong\u003e once the tenancy has lasted longer than nine consecutive months, unless a valid waiver or statutory exception applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is not an unconditional right to remain in the premises. Instead, the tenant may have a right to compensation where renewal is refused or unreasonable renewal terms are demanded and no statutory exception applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the statutory right to compensation applies, the minimum compensation under Chapter 12 section 58 b is an amount corresponding to one annual rent under the terminated lease. Additional reasonable compensation for further financial loss can also be relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWaiver of indirect security of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA waiver should not be hidden inside the main lease. Swedish law requires a separately executed document. Rent Tribunal approval is the main rule where the waiver is entered into before the tenancy has lasted more than nine months, subject to specific statutory exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOfficial HN3\/HN5 procedures should therefore be used where relevant instead of relying on a generic waiver sentence in the main lease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTermination for vacation or change of terms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial lease notices are formally demanding. A landlord terminating for vacation or altered terms must, where the statutory rules apply, specify the renewal terms demanded or the reason renewal is refused and inform the tenant of the two-month deadline for referring the dispute to the Rent Tribunal for mediation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA defective landlord notice can be ineffective. A tenant terminating for a change of terms must likewise state the requested changes and refer the matter to the Rent Tribunal within two months if the parties do not reach agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarket rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn renewal disputes, requested rent is assessed against market rent – the rent the premises can be expected to command on the open market at the end of the lease. Comparable premises in the locality are the primary reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity, deposit and guarantees\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement includes separate options for a cash deposit, bank guarantee, parent-company guarantee or another agreed security. The amount, duration, permitted use and release conditions should be documented clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can record requirements for business, property and liability insurance and who is responsible for building insurance. The insurance arrangements should reflect the actual business operated in the premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English agreement is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference. Both versions are governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US commercial lease template.\u003c\/strong\u003e English terminology is used to make the agreement easier to work with internationally, but the legal framework remains Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/lokalhyresavtal-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Lokalhyresavtal – Word\/PDF + English + användarguide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal or tax advice is particularly appropriate for long or high-value leases, substantial tenant improvements, turnover rent, complex CPI\/indexation arrangements, voluntary VAT taxation, waiver of security of tenure, business transfers, environmental or regulatory requirements, forfeiture, termination or change-of-terms proceedings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 13 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a commercial tenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eGenerally yes after more than nine months, but the protection is indirect. It principally concerns compensation, mediation and related rights rather than an unconditional right to remain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan security of tenure be waived inside the main lease?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe waiver must be made in a separately executed document. Rent Tribunal approval is commonly required, subject to statutory exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rent be indexed every year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn alternative calculation basis such as CPI indexation can be used when the statutory conditions are met, including for certain fixed-term commercial leases of at least three years. The clause should be drafted carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs VAT always added to commercial rent?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Real-property letting is generally VAT exempt. Voluntary VAT taxation may be used where the statutory requirements are satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes this template guarantee the outcome of every commercial tenancy?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a general documentation aid. The permitted use, negotiated commercial terms, mandatory law, VAT\/tax treatment and the actual circumstances must be assessed in each case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid governed by Swedish law and does not replace individual legal or tax advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178888474966,"sku":"7350139912822","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/commercial-lease-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791268259"},{"product_id":"mall-for-hyresavtal-andrahandsuthyrning-word-pdf","title":"Subletting agreement – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLease agreement for subletting under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for subletting rental apartments (hyresrätt), owner-occupied apartments (bostadsrätt), and other privately owned homes. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and detailed user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated for the Private Rental Act (2026:772), the amendments to Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code (jordabalken), and the 2026 regulations regarding the subletting of owner-occupied apartments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLease agreement – subletting DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish master template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLease agreement – subletting PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains choice of regulations, permits, rent, notice, and security of tenure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish rules.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant legal amendment from July 1, 2026\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product version conflated the rules for rental apartments and owner-occupied apartments and still described the rent for owner-occupied apartments using the 2012 capital cost model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new \u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Rental Act (2026:772)\u003c\/strong\u003e entered into force on July 1, 2026. It applies to certain sublettings of privately owned homes, but \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e when the sublessor holds the property as a rental apartment. In that case, Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code applies instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTherefore, the template begins with a specific rule-selection step to ensure the correct provisions are applied before the agreement is completed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubletting a rental apartment (hyresrätt)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAnyone renting a rental apartment who allows someone else to use the entire home independently normally requires the landlord's consent. If the landlord says no, the primary tenant can apply for permission from the Rent Tribunal (Hyresnämnden).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePermission normally requires valid reasons, such as temporary work or studies in another location, illness, or cohabitation trials. The sublessor remains responsible toward their own landlord.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubletting an owner-occupied apartment (bostadsrätt)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, an owner-occupier needs the board's consent for subletting. If the board refuses, the Rent Tribunal can grant permission if the owner-occupier has grounds for the sublet and the association does not have reasonable cause to object.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the 2026 wording, previous sublets are only to be taken into account when they have occurred to a significant extent. Permission from the Rent Tribunal must be limited to a specific time period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReasonable rent for a sublet rental apartment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen subletting under Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code, the rent may not exceed the rent the sublessor pays themselves, plus permitted surcharges.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFurniture and other equipment: a maximum of \u003cstrong\u003e15%\u003c\/strong\u003e of the sublessor's own rent.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElectricity, broadband, parking, and other utilities: no more than the sublessor's actual costs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWhen renting out only part of the home, the base rent must be pro-rated according to the extent of the sublet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent when the Private Rental Act (2026:772) applies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor new agreements falling under the Private Rental Act, the rent must be agreed upon as a specific amount. The parties may additionally agree on certain consumption-based utilities in accordance with the law's provisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Rent Tribunal can review the rent against the new law's comparative model. The old model from the 2012 law – capital costs based on the home's market value plus operating costs – should therefore not be used automatically for new agreements after July 1, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Private Rental Act also permits index clauses under specific conditions. The party wishing to implement an index adjustment must notify the other party in writing, and as a general rule, the previous rent must have applied for at least one year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOvercharging and refunds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor sublets covered by Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code, the Rent Tribunal can order a refund if the sublessor has charged rent exceeding a reasonable level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA decision according to Chapter 12, Section 55f can cover a maximum of \u003cstrong\u003etwo years\u003c\/strong\u003e prior to the application date. If the subtenant has already vacated the home, the application must normally have been received by the Rent Tribunal within \u003cstrong\u003ethree months of moving out\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLease term and notice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate selections for open-ended and fixed-term agreements and warns against using the same termination clause regardless of the legal framework.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChapter 12, Swedish Land Code:\u003c\/strong\u003e an open-ended agreement for a home can, as a general rule, be terminated to the end of the month occurring three months after the notice. The tenant always has a statutory right to terminate a residential lease with three months' notice to the end of the month.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Rental Act:\u003c\/strong\u003e a fixed-term agreement normally ends on the agreed end date. The tenant is always allowed to terminate the agreement to the end of the month, at the earliest three months after the notice.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA subtenant renting a rental apartment under Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code normally gains security of tenure only after the sublet has lasted for more than \u003cstrong\u003etwo consecutive years\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the parties need to agree on a waiver of security of tenure, this must be done in a specially prepared document using the correct form and procedure. The same system of security of tenure does not apply under the Private Rental Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent payment – different time limits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor residential leases under Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code, a delay in payment of more than \u003cstrong\u003eone week\u003c\/strong\u003e after the due date can constitute grounds for forfeiture. Under the Private Rental Act, a delay of more than \u003cstrong\u003etwo weeks\u003c\/strong\u003e is specified as grounds for the sublessor to terminate the agreement prematurely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis does not mean automatic eviction. Statutory rules regarding rectification, recovery, and procedures may still apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity deposit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has a separate section for deposits regarding the amount, payment date, which documented claims may be offset, and when the refund is to take place. The deposit is not described as an automatic fee that the sublessor may keep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInspection, inventory, and keys\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMove-in inspection, inventory lists, known defects, keys, and photo\/video documentation can be documented in the agreement or as attachments. This reduces the risk of later disputes regarding damages and normal wear and tear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDuty of care, conduct, and further subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe subtenant must take care of the home and follow applicable rules of conduct and association rules. The template does not contain any general right to sublet the home further or transfer the agreement without the necessary consent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language reference governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Swedish version is the master version in this product package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-for-hyresavtal-andrahandsuthyrning-engelska\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you like the English version as the primary product? See Sublease Agreement Template – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConsider individual advice for long-term subletting, multiple sublet properties, uncertainty regarding which law applies, very high rent, disputes over permits, security of tenure, forfeiture\/eviction, or major damage claims.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish master version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 pages across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Private Rental Act apply when I sublet my rental apartment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Private Rental Act (2026:772) expressly does not apply when the sublessor themselves holds the home as a rental apartment. In that case, Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code is the starting point.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAm I allowed to add 15% for furniture?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen subletting a rental apartment under the Land Code, surcharges for furniture and other equipment may not exceed 15% of the sublessor's own rent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a subtenant get overcharged rent back?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, in situations where the refund rules of Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code apply, the Rent Tribunal can decide on a refund of unreasonable rent according to the time limits specified by law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need a permit even if I don't charge rent?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, independent use of a rental apartment or owner-occupied apartment can constitute subletting even without rent. The permit rules must therefore be checked separately from the question of compensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the rules the same for rental apartments and owner-occupied apartments?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. This is the main reason why the new template has a specific rule-selection step. Permits, rent setting, and security of tenure can differ significantly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178936119638,"sku":"7350139912839","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/andrahandsuthyrning-hero-2027.png?v=1791306213"},{"product_id":"mall-for-hyresavtal-andrahandsuthyrning-engelska","title":"Sublease Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAndrahandsavtal styrt av svensk rätt\u003c\/strong\u003e – ett engelskspråkigt dokumentpaket 2026\/2027 för andrahandsuthyrning av bostäder och privat uthyrning i Sverige. Paketet innehåller ett redigerbart engelskt avtal i Word\/PDF-format, en svensk referensversion samt detaljerade användarguider på båda språken.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJuridiskt granskat: 6 oktober 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUppdaterat för lagen om privatuthyrning (2026:772), 2026 års ändringar i 12 kap. jordabalken samt gällande regler i bostadsrättslagen om andrahandsuthyrning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVad ingår?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAndrahandsavtal – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eRedigerbar engelsk primärmall styrd av svensk rätt.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAndrahandsavtal – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eUtskriftsklar engelsk version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelsk användarguide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eFörklarar upplåtelseform, tillstånd, hyra, uppsägning, oskälig hyra och besittningsskydd.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvenskt referensavtal – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSvensk referensversion för hyresvärdar, hyresgäster, bostadsrättsföreningar och rådgivare.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensguide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eMotsvarande vägledning på svenska.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eViktigt från 1 juli 2026: identifiera rätt svenskt regelverk först\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDen äldre produktversionen blandade ihop reglerna för andrahandsuthyrning av hyresrätt och uthyrning av privatbostad. Sveriges nya \u003cstrong\u003elag om privatuthyrning (2026:772)\u003c\/strong\u003e trädde i kraft den 1 juli 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDen nya lagen är \u003cstrong\u003einte\u003c\/strong\u003e tillämplig när andrahandsuthyraren själv innehar bostaden med hyresrätt. En bostadsrätt eller annan privatbostad som hyrs ut av en fysisk person eller ett dödsbo kan däremot omfattas av privatuthyrningslagen om dess lagstadgade villkor är uppfyllda.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMallen börjar därför med ett val av rättsligt regelverk innan övriga villkor fylls i.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAndrahandsuthyrning av hyresrätt\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEn förstahandshyresgäst som låter en annan person använda lägenheten självständigt behöver i regel hyresvärdens samtycke. Om samtycke vägras kan tillstånd sökas hos hyresnämnden när de lagstadgade kraven är uppfyllda.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFörstahandshyresgästen förblir ansvarig gentemot sin hyresvärd för hyra och för hur lägenheten används.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUthyrning av bostadsrätt\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEn bostadsrättshavare behöver normalt bostadsrättsföreningens styrelses samtycke för andrahandsuthyrning. Om styrelsen vägrar kan hyresnämnden ge tidsbegränsat tillstånd när bostadsrättshavaren har skäl för uthyrningen och föreningen inte har ett befogat skäl att vägra.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEnligt den nuvarande lydelsen från 2026 ska tidigare andrahandsuthyrningar endast beaktas om de skett i betydande omfattning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHyra för andrahandsuthyrd hyresrätt enligt 12 kap.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFör en andrahandsuthyrd hyresrätt som styrs av 12 kap. jordabalken får hyran inte överstiga förstahandshyran plus tillåtna tillägg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMöbler och utrustning:\u003c\/strong\u003e högst 15 % av förstahandshyran.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEl, bredband, parkering och andra inkluderade tjänster:\u003c\/strong\u003e högst vad som motsvarar uthyrarens faktiska kostnad.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelvis uthyrning:\u003c\/strong\u003e förstahandshyran bör proportioneras utifrån den faktiska del som hyrs ut.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHyra enligt lagen om privatuthyrning (2026:772)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFör nya avtal som styrs av 2026 års privatuthyrningslag ska hyran avtalas som ett fast belopp. Vissa förbrukningsbaserade tjänster kan debiteras separat i enlighet med lagen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHyresnämnden kan pröva hyran med hjälp av den nya lagstadgade jämförelsemodellen. Den upphävda kapitalvinstmodellen från 2012 bör därför inte automatiskt användas för nya avtal som ingåtts efter 1 juli 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLagen tillåter även indexklausuler under förutsättning att lagstadgade krav på förvarning och tidpunkt följs. Den tidigare hyran måste i regel ha gällt i minst ett år innan en indexjustering kan träda i kraft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOskälig hyra och återbetalning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFör andrahandsuthyrning som styrs av 12 kap. jordabalken kan hyresnämnden besluta om återbetalning om den mottagna hyran överstigit den lagliga nivån. De lagstadgade reglerna för återbetalning kan omfatta hyra som betalats före ansökan, med förbehåll för tidsfristerna i lagen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm andrahandshyresgästen redan har flyttat ut gäller en kort lagstadgad tidsfrist för ansökan. Den inkluderade användarguiden belyser dessa tidsfrister snarare än att presentera hyrestvister som automatiska krav.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAvtalstid och uppsägning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAvtalet innehåller separata alternativ för tillsvidare- och tidsbestämda avtal och undviker att använda en generisk uppsägningsklausul för alla typer av uthyrning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e12 kap. jordabalken:\u003c\/strong\u003e ett hyresavtal för bostad på obestämd tid sägs i regel upp att gälla vid ett månadsskifte med tre månaders uppsägningstid. Tidsbestämda avtal kan kräva uppsägning beroende på deras varaktighet och omständigheter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrivatuthyrningslagen:\u003c\/strong\u003e ett tidsbestämt avtal upphör normalt vid avtalad slutdag. Hyresgästen får alltid säga upp avtalet till ett månadsskifte som inträffar tidigast tre månader efter uppsägningen. Ett avtal på obestämd tid kan också sägas upp till ett månadsskifte som inträffar tidigast tre månader efter uppsägningen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBesittningsskydd\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFör en hyresrätt som hyrs ut i andra hand enligt 12 kap. erhåller andrahandshyresgästen i regel besittningsskydd först efter att andrahandsuthyrningen varat i mer än \u003cstrong\u003etvå sammanhängande år\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm parterna behöver avtala om avstående från besittningsskydd ska detta ske i ett separat dokument med rätt formulär från hyresnämnden och i enlighet med fastställd procedur. Privatuthyrningslagen använder inte samma struktur för besittningsskydd som 12 kap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDröjsmål med betalning och förtida uppsägning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOlika lagstadgade trösklar gäller beroende på regelverk. Enligt 12 kap. kan dröjsmål med hyra i mer än en vecka utgöra grund för förverkande. Enligt privatuthyrningslagen räknas dröjsmål i mer än två veckor som en grund för hyresvärden att säga upp avtalet i förtid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVräkning är inte automatisk. Regler om rättelse, återvinning, meddelande och processuella krav kan fortfarande vara tillämpliga.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDeposition\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAvtalet innehåller ett strukturerat avsnitt om deposition som omfattar belopp, betalningsdatum, tillåtna dokumenterade avdrag och återbetalning. Depositionen beskrivs inte som en automatisk avgift som andrahandsuthyraren får behålla när hyresförhållandet upphör.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBesiktningsprotokoll, inventarielista och nycklar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSkick vid inflyttning, inventarier, kända skador, nycklar och stödjande foto-\/videodokumentation kan antecknas i avtalet eller bilagor. Detta kan väsentligt minska risken för framtida tvister om skador och normalt slitage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAnvändning, boende och vidareuthyrning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMallen anger tillåten användning som bostad, övriga boende, husdjur, rökning och tillämpliga ordningsregler för huset eller bostadsrättsföreningen. Den ger inte en obegränsad rätt att hyra ut i andra hand eller överlåta lägenheten vidare utan det lagstadgade samtycke eller tillstånd som krävs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEngelsk primärversion – svensk referens inkluderad\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet engelska avtalet är primärversionen i denna produkt. Den svenska versionen inkluderas som referens. Båda versionerna är strukturerade kring svensk rätt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDetta är inte en brittisk eller amerikansk mall för sublease.\u003c\/strong\u003e Engelsk terminologi används för att göra dokumenten lättare att arbeta med internationellt, men det styrande juridiska ramverket är svenskt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-for-hyresavtal-andrahandsuthyrning-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFöredrar du den svenskspråkiga produkten? Se Hyresavtal andrahandsuthyrning – Word\/PDF + Engelska + guide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNär individuell rådgivning är särskilt lämplig\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividuell juridisk rådgivning är särskilt lämplig vid långa andrahandsuthyrningar, flera uthyrda bostäder, osäkerhet kring gällande regelverk, hög hyra, tillståndstvister, frågor om besittningsskydd, förverkande\/vräkning eller omfattande skadeståndskrav.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFilformat och leverans\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF och ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpråk:\u003c\/strong\u003e Engelsk primärversion + svensk referens.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAntal filer:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotalt antal sidor:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 fördelat på de fyra dokumenten.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLeverans:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital nedladdning. Ingen fysisk produkt skickas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVanliga frågor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGäller privatuthyrningslagen när jag hyr ut min hyresrätt i andra hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. 2026 års lag exkluderar uttryckligen situationer där den som hyr ut bostaden själv innehar den med hyresrätt. 12 kap. jordabalken är då utgångspunkten.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKan jag lägga på 15 % för möbler?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFör en andrahandsuthyrd hyresrätt enligt 12 kap. får tillägget för möbler och annan utrustning inte överstiga 15 % av förstahandshyran.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKan en andrahandshyresgäst få tillbaka oskälig hyra?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eJa, där reglerna om återbetalning i 12 kap. är tillämpliga kan hyresnämnden besluta om återbetalning av hyra som mottagits utöver den lagliga nivån, under förutsättning att lagstadgade krav och tidsfrister är uppfyllda.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBehöver jag tillstånd även om ingen hyra tas ut?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePotentiellt ja. Självständig användning av en hyresrätt eller bostadsrätt kan utgöra andrahandsuthyrning även om betalningsupplägget ser annorlunda ut eller om ingen hyra alls tas ut. Regler om tillstånd bör därför kontrolleras separat från hyresregler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eÄr reglerna desamma för hyresrätt och bostadsrätt?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. Tillstånd, hyresregler och besittningsskydd kan skilja sig väsentligt. Det är därför den nya mallen börjar med att identifiera bostadstyp och gällande svenskt regelverk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eDetta paket är ett generellt dokumentstöd styrt av svensk rätt och ersätter inte individuell juridisk rådgivning.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48179012469078,"sku":"7350139912846","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/sublease-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791307731"},{"product_id":"mall-for-overlatelseavtal-enskild-firma-till-aktiebolag","title":"Transfer Agreement Template – Sole Proprietorship to Swedish Limited Company","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Agreement for the conversion from sole proprietorship to a limited company (Aktiebolag)\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for business asset transfers under Swedish law. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally and tax reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated with current regulations regarding transfer at under-value, tax allocation reserves, expansion funds, business transfers under the Value Added Tax Act, accounting, and transfer of undertakings for employees.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish master template for business asset transfers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains tax, VAT, reserves, liabilities, agreements, staff, and accounting.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eBusiness Transfer Agreement governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: conversion is more than just an agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA sole proprietorship is not a separate legal entity from the individual business owner, whereas a limited company is a separate legal entity. Therefore, assets, liabilities, agreements, permits, personnel, tax registrations, and accounting must be handled explicitly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new agreement therefore distinguishes between what is transferred under civil law, what requires the consent of third parties, and which tax conditions must be checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBusiness transfer or contribution in kind?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA conversion can usually be carried out by the registered limited company purchasing the assets of the business, or by contribution in kind (apport) at the time of company formation. This product is primarily designed for \u003cstrong\u003ebusiness asset transfers\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eContributions in kind require specific corporate legal documents and an auditor's certificate. The standard template should therefore not be used as a substitute for contribution-in-kind documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssets and value distribution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate tables for fixtures, inventory, goodwill, intellectual property, accounts receivable, and other assets. Book\/tax values and agreed transfer values are kept separate to facilitate accounting and tax assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLiabilities – the company cannot unilaterally release you from personal liability\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe old product described liabilities as if they could simply be “taken over” by the limited company. That is too simplistic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe limited company can internally undertake to carry a debt, but the sole trader is not automatically released from the bank, lessor, or other creditor. If an actual change of debtor is to take place, the creditor's consent must normally be documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template therefore has a specific appendix for liabilities, collateral, and creditor consents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAgreements and permits are not automatically transferred\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLeasing agreements, rental agreements, supplier contracts, customer agreements, software licenses, domains, and government permits may contain prohibitions against transfer or requirements for consent. Certain permits must be applied for again when the business is moved to a new legal entity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific checklist for agreements, permits, and intellectual property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTransfer at under-value and withdrawal taxation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf business assets are transferred to the limited company at a price below market value, withdrawal taxation may normally apply. However, in the case of conversion, there are rules that, under certain conditions, make it possible to transfer assets at tax value without withdrawal taxation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency’s guidance states, for the typical conversion situation, that the entire business or an entire branch of business must be transferred, that the shares must be qualified, and that the limited company should not have previous deficits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAssumed liabilities are also counted as part of the consideration for the assets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTax allocation reserve\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTax allocation reserves can, under specific conditions, be taken over by the limited company. The transfer must not, among other things, trigger withdrawal taxation, and the sole trader must make a capital contribution to the limited company corresponding to the tax allocation reserves being transferred.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe limited company must also make a corresponding provision in its accounts. The package includes specific fields for reserve amounts, years, and contributions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExpansion fund – 79.4%\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOther requirements apply to the expansion fund. According to current rules, the expansion fund can cease without reversal if, among other things, all real assets are transferred to the limited company, the business owner requests that the fund not be reversed, and a contribution equivalent to at least \u003cstrong\u003e79.4% of the expansion fund\u003c\/strong\u003e is made to the company.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is now explicitly built into both the agreement template and the user guide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT on business transfers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product text described business transfers as generally VAT-free. The new version is more accurate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 5, Section 38 of the Value Added Tax Act, a qualified transfer of assets in connection with a business transfer is not treated as a supply of goods or a provision of services, but only when the Act's conditions are met. Among other things, the VAT that would otherwise have been charged must be deductible or refundable for the recipient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvestment goods and real estate may require further VAT assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEmployees and transfer of undertakings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the transfer falls under Section 6 b of the Employment Protection Act, rights and obligations under employment relationships may transfer to the limited company. An employee may object to the transfer, and the previous employer may still be liable for financial obligations relating to the time before the transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAny MBL (Co-determination Act) negotiations, collective agreements, and staff-related liabilities must therefore be assessed separately. The template includes a specific staff appendix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and cut-off date\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement now has fields for a clear cut-off date, customer and supplier invoices around the transition, inventory, accounts receivable, liabilities, and the practical handover of accounting materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, accounting information must be preserved for seven years after the end of the calendar year in which the financial year ended. A conversion does not mean that historical archiving responsibility disappears.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate requires separate handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the business includes commercial real estate, this standard template should not be used alone. Real estate transfers have specific formal requirements and may involve issues regarding title registration, stamp duty, capital taxation, and VAT adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompany names, domains, trademarks, and customer registries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIntellectual and digital assets also need to be identified explicitly. Customer registries and other personal data may not be moved casually but must be handled in accordance with applicable data protection regulations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeven separate appendix types\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAsset inventory and value distribution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLiabilities, collateral, and creditor consents\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAgreements, permits, IP, and consents\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEmployees and staff-related liabilities\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTax allocation reserve, expansion fund, and tax basis\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAT assessment and any investment goods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAccounting, cut-off date, and practical handover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package also includes a complete \u003cstrong\u003eBusiness Transfer Agreement – Sole Trader to Swedish Limited Company\u003c\/strong\u003e in English. The English version is a reference version and is explicitly governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen professional advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSeek individual tax, accounting, or legal advice in cases involving significant goodwill, real estate, tax allocation\/expansion funds, multiple business branches, large loans\/leasing, employees, negative tax capital, complex VAT, or significant financial values.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-for-skuldebrev-vid-overtagande-av-firma\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the purchase price need to be documented with a promissory note? See also Promissory note for taking over a business →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish master version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 17 pages across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I transfer everything at book value without tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. The rules on withdrawal taxation and under-value must be met. For larger values, the structure should be checked by a tax advisor or accounting consultant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo my old debts disappear when the limited company takes them over?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not automatically. An internal agreement with the limited company does not normally release you from the original creditor. Check if the creditor accepts the change of debtor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan tax allocation reserves and expansion funds be treated the same way?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They are subject to different rules. The expansion fund, among other things, has a current contribution requirement of at least 79.4% of the fund's amount.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould VAT be charged on the transfer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on whether the business transfer rule in the Value Added Tax Act is applicable. The assessment must be made before invoicing and accounting for the transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the agreement suitable if the business contains real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a sole document. Real property requires specific documentation and a separate legal and tax assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, tax, or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48179797623126,"sku":"7350139912853","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/overlatelseavtal-hero-2027.png?v=1791320923"},{"product_id":"mall-for-skuldebrev-vid-overtagande-av-firma","title":"Promissory note for business takeover – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePromissory note for business takeover\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for documenting a purchase price debt when all or part of a business is transferred, for example from a sole proprietorship to a limited company. The package includes the main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and user guides in both Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe template is designed as a \u003cstrong\u003esimple promissory note\u003c\/strong\u003e (*enkelt skuldebrev*) under Swedish law and addresses issues such as purchase price debt, interest, amortization, delay, early repayment, set-off, transfer, statute of limitations, and potential collateral.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in this package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePromissory Note – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish main template for purchase price debt.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePromissory Note – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains interest, payment schedule, set-off, collateral, transfer, and statute of limitations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSimple Promissory Note governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant correction: a simple promissory note can be transferred\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous product text stated that a simple promissory note cannot be transferred without the debtor's consent. This is too categorical and has now been corrected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA simple promissory note is issued to a specific creditor and can be transferred. As a general rule, the new creditor does not gain better rights against the debtor than the previous creditor had, and the debtor’s objections and certain rights of set-off may persist. Furthermore, notification to the debtor is important both practically and in terms of property law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAdapted for purchase price debt – not just a general private loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template explicitly links the debt to an underlying transfer agreement. It specifies details such as the date of the business transfer, the original purchase price, any cash portion, and the part of the purchase price remaining as debt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it easier to distinguish the vendor note from other debts between the parties and to document the relationship between the purchase price, final settlement, and any subsequent adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSimple promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is intended as a \u003cstrong\u003esimple promissory note\u003c\/strong\u003e to a named creditor. It should not be used as a negotiable promissory note (*löpande skuldebrev*) to bearer or to order without first assessing the legal implications separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt amount and payment schedule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can choose between final payment on a specific date or amortization according to a separate payment schedule. The template includes a table for amortizations, interest, and remaining principal, as well as a specific history section for subsequent balance confirmations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides separate options for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einterest-free purchase price debt,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efixed annual interest, or\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evariable interest based on the Riksbank's reference rate plus an agreed margin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInterest and calculation basis should be clearly stated. If the creditor is also an owner of, or related to, the limited company, a tax assessment of market-rate interest may be necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDefault interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Interest Act (*räntelagen*) regulates when default interest begins to accrue. In the case of a pre-determined due date, interest can generally accrue from the due date. The statutory level according to Section 6 of the Interest Act is the Riksbank's reference rate plus eight percentage points, unless the parties have a valid agreement leading to other terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEarly maturity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is an optional clause for early maturity in the event of, for example, significant payment delays or insolvency-related events. The clause is structured with written notice and a cure period rather than automatically triggering immediate maturity of the entire debt for every minor delay.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEarly repayment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template allows the debtor to repay all or part of the debt early, according to the choice made by the parties. If special compensation or restrictions are to apply, these must be explicitly documented and assessed against the circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSet-off and claims under the transfer agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSince the debt is linked to a business transfer, the parties may simultaneously have claims against each other under the transfer agreement – for example, due to warranties, final settlement, or price adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore includes a specific section on how set-off should be handled without attempting to override mandatory or otherwise applicable set-off rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTransfer of the promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen a simple promissory note is transferred, the new creditor normally does not gain better rights against the debtor than the previous creditor had. The debtor should be notified of the transfer so that future payments are made to the correct recipient and to ensure the transfer has the intended effect against the transferor's creditors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStatute of limitations – normally ten years\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the typical business receivable this template is intended for, the general limitation period is normally ten years if the limitation is not interrupted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInterruption of the statute of limitations can occur through, among other things, the debtor acknowledging the debt, paying interest or amortization, by a written demand\/reminder, or through legal action. After an interruption, a new limitation period begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCollateral and guarantees\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are options for unsecured debt or separate collateral. If a pledge, company mortgage, personal guarantee, or other security is to be used, separate documentation and sometimes additional measures are often needed to ensure the security has the intended effect under property law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen the creditor is also a shareholder or board member\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the limited company is the debtor and the creditor is also a shareholder, board member, or related party, the company's decision should be properly documented. The Companies Act (*aktiebolagslagen*) contains conflict of interest rules for the board and rules regarding board minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn a company with only one shareholder, agreements between the shareholder and the company that do not involve routine business transactions on standard terms must be noted in or added to the board's minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTax issues regarding owner loans and interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the creditor is an owner in a closely held company (*fåmansföretag*), the interest and other terms should be reviewed from a tax perspective. The Swedish Tax Agency's guidance for loans from shareholders to closely held companies is based on market-rate interest and an individual assessment of, among other things, risk and external financing costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA vendor note following a business transfer is not necessarily identical to a standard cash owner loan, so the tax assessment should be based on the actual setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eApplication for a payment order and court\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe promissory note is important evidence of the debt and its terms, but the document itself is not the same as a court judgment or ruling. If the debtor does not pay, the creditor may need to apply for a payment order (*betalningsföreläggande*) with the Swedish Enforcement Authority (*Kronofogden*) or initiate legal proceedings in court, depending on the situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDispute resolution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe old template used arbitration as a general standard. This has been removed. For a typical vendor note, a Swedish general court is a more neutral standard solution, while arbitration can be agreed upon separately when the size of the debt and the parties' commercial needs justify it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package also includes a complete \u003cstrong\u003eSimple Promissory Note – Business Transfer\u003c\/strong\u003e in English. The English version is a reference version and is explicitly governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-for-overlatelseavtal-enskild-firma-till-aktiebolag\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you also need to document the business transfer itself? See Transfer Agreement – Sole Proprietorship to Limited Company →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a simple promissory note be transferred without the debtor's approval?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, as a starting point, a simple promissory note can be transferred. However, the debtor's legal position is protected by specific rules, and notification of the transfer is important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a ten-year statute of limitations always guaranteed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Ten years is the general limitation period for the type of business debt the template is primarily intended for, but specific rules and circumstances can affect the assessment. Interruption of the limitation period must also be demonstrable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the promissory note be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general witness requirement for this type of simple promissory note. Witnesses can be used if the parties wish to strengthen evidence regarding the signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the promissory note include interest?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The parties can choose interest-free debt or agree on interest. In relationships between owners and the company, tax treatment should also be checked.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a pledge or guarantee clause in the promissory note always sufficient?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Depending on the type of security, separate documents, notifications, registration, or other measures may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal, tax, or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48180173209942,"sku":"7350139912860","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skuldebrev-overtagande-firma-hero-2027.png?v=1791321835"},{"product_id":"aktenskapsforord-mall-fore-aktenskap-word-pdf","title":"Prenuptial agreement – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial agreement before marriage under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for spouses-to-be who wish to determine which property is to be separate property and which is to be marital property. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated to reflect the current wording of the Marriage Code and the Swedish Tax Agency's guidance, including clarifications published on October 1, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial agreement before marriage – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable main Swedish template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial agreement before marriage – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains registration, entry into force, yields, surrogates, and common mistakes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrenuptial Agreement governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide to the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant correction: witnesses are not required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous product was delivered as a version \"with witnessing\". According to the formal requirements in Chapter 7, Section 3 of the Marriage Code, a prenuptial agreement must be in writing, dated, and signed by both parties, and registered with the Swedish Tax Agency. \u003cstrong\u003eWitnesses are not a statutory formal requirement.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWitnesses can be used voluntarily for evidentiary reasons, but they do not replace the parties' own signatures or registration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can you decide in a prenuptial agreement?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSpouses-to-be may decide that property that belongs to or later accrues to either of them shall be that person's separate property. The prenuptial agreement can cover all property, only one party's property, or specifically defined property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is primarily designed for \u003cstrong\u003ecomplete or unilateral separation of property before the wedding\u003c\/strong\u003e. If only a certain company, a specific property, an account, or another specifically identified asset is to be separate property, a more specifically defined template is often more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarital property is not the same as joint ownership\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA prenuptial agreement does not change who owns an asset during the marriage. Marital rights become significant primarily in the event of a division of marital property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is therefore misleading to say that \"all property is divided equally\" without a prenuptial agreement. As a general rule, the spouses' marital property is included in a division of property; debts are deducted, and the net value is then divided according to the rules of the law. Furthermore, property may already be separate property on other grounds, such as through a gift or a will with conditions regarding separate property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSurrogates – property replacing separate property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, what replaces separate property is also separate property, unless otherwise stipulated. This could be, for example, a new asset purchased with money from the sale of a separate property asset.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template makes this clear and also provides the option to specify exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eYields – an important distinction\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConversely, the yield from separate property is, according to the main rule of the law, \u003cstrong\u003emarital property\u003c\/strong\u003e, unless otherwise stipulated in the legal act that made the property separate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis may apply to, for example, dividends, interest, and rental income. The new template therefore forces an active choice between the yield also being separate property or the law's main rule applying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFuture property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marriage Code makes it possible for the prenuptial agreement to cover property that a party already owns and property that later accrues to the party. Therefore, the template contains options for both current and future property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOwnership rights and debts do not change automatically\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA prenuptial agreement does not transfer ownership of the house, the company, securities, or other assets between the parties. Nor does it make one party liable for the other's debts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf ownership is to be changed, a separate civil law transfer is required, such as a purchase, gift, or other relevant deed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA prenuptial agreement does not determine who inherits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe prenuptial agreement affects what is separate property and marital property during a division of property, but it does not regulate who inherits from a spouse. Inheritance planning may therefore require a will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration with the Swedish Tax Agency\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTo have legal effect according to the rules on prenuptial agreements, the document must be registered with the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe original document must be sent to Skatteverket, Äktenskapsregistret, 871 87 Härnösand.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBoth parties must have signed and dated the document.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePersonal identity numbers should be provided so that the parties can be identified.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency's current application fee as of October 6, 2026, is \u003cstrong\u003e275 SEK\u003c\/strong\u003e per registration case.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAfter registration, the Swedish Tax Agency sends back the original and archives a copy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does a prenuptial agreement before marriage take effect?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf a prenuptial agreement between spouses-to-be is submitted for registration \u003cstrong\u003eno later than one month after the wedding\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is valid from the date the marriage was entered into.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf it is submitted later, it does not have retroactive effect from the wedding day. After the wedding, the parties are treated as spouses, and the effect of the agreement is linked to when the document is received by the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration is not a material quality check\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency mainly checks the formal requirements for registration. Registration does not mean that the authority has determined that the agreement is materially valid, fair, or has the exact legal effect the parties intended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAvoid time limits and conditions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency's legal guidance indicates that spouses cannot time-limit or condition a prenuptial agreement in the way that sometimes occurs in private agreements. If the parties later wish to change the property arrangement, they should instead draw up and register a new prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCan a prenuptial agreement be changed?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A new prenuptial agreement can, for example, stipulate that property that was previously made separate property is to be marital property again. The new document must meet the same formal and registration requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUnreasonable conditions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 12, Section 3 of the Marriage Code, a condition in a prenuptial agreement may in certain cases be adjusted or disregarded in the event of a division of property if the condition is unreasonable in view of, among other things, the content of the agreement, the circumstances at the time of its creation, and subsequently occurring circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is therefore inappropriate to describe a registered prenuptial agreement as an absolute guarantee of a certain future financial outcome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInternational connection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf either party has foreign citizenship, lives abroad, owns property in another country, or plans to move, EU rules on matrimonial property regimes and Swedish private international law may affect the choice of law, form, and effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn such cases, individual legal advice is recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package also contains a full \u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement – Before Marriage\u003c\/strong\u003e in English. The English version is a reference version and is expressly governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/aktenskapsforord-mall-engelska-marriage-contract-before-marriage-template\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you want the English version as the main product? See Prenuptial Agreement – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 9 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust a prenuptial agreement be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Witnesses are not included in the statutory formal requirements for prenuptial agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the prenuptial agreement be registered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A prenuptial agreement must be registered with the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we make all future property separate property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, prenuptial agreements can cover property that a party currently owns or that later accrues to the party. The wording should be clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a dividend from separate shares automatically become separate property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. According to the main rule, the yield from separate property is marital property unless otherwise stipulated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we write that the prenuptial agreement only applies for five years?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat should not be done. The Swedish Tax Agency's legal guidance indicates that prenuptial agreements cannot be time-limited in that way. If you want to change the arrangement later, a new prenuptial agreement should be drawn up and registered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes registration guarantee that the content works exactly as intended?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Tax Agency does not perform a full material review of the legal effects of the agreement upon registration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation support according to Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48203100160342,"sku":"7350139912884","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/aktenskapsforord-fore-aktenskap-hero-2027.png?v=1791323745"},{"product_id":"aktenskapsforord-mall-engelska-marriage-contract-before-marriage-template","title":"Prenuptial Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first 2026\/2027 document package for prospective spouses who want to determine which property will be separate property and which will remain marital property under Swedish law. The package includes an editable English Word\/PDF agreement, a Swedish reference version and user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 7 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated against the current Swedish Marriage Code and the Swedish Tax Agency's guidance, including the guidance update published on 1 October 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains registration, timing, separate property, substitute property, yield and common drafting mistakes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference agreement – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for spouses, advisers and the Swedish registration process.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant correction: witnesses are not required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product placed unnecessary emphasis on witness signatures. Under Chapter 7 section 3 of the Swedish Marriage Code, a prenuptial agreement must be in writing, dated, signed by both prospective spouses and registered with the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWitnesses are not a statutory form requirement.\u003c\/strong\u003e They may be used voluntarily for evidentiary purposes, but they do not replace the parties' signatures or registration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can a Swedish prenuptial agreement do?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProspective spouses can agree that property already owned by either of them, or property acquired later, shall be that spouse's separate property. The arrangement can cover all property, only one spouse's property or selected property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis package is primarily designed for \u003cstrong\u003efull or one-sided separation of property before marriage\u003c\/strong\u003e. If only a specific company, property, account or other identified asset should be separate, a more narrowly drafted agreement is generally more suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarital property does not mean co-ownership\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA Swedish prenuptial agreement does not change who legally owns an asset during the marriage. The distinction between marital property and separate property mainly affects a future division of property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is therefore inaccurate to say that “all property is divided equally” when there is no prenuptial agreement. In a Swedish division of property, marital property is generally included, liabilities are deducted and the remaining net amount is divided according to the statutory rules. Some property can already be separate on another legal basis, such as a gift or will containing a separate-property condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitute property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 7 section 2 of the Swedish Marriage Code, property replacing separate property is generally also separate property unless otherwise provided by the legal instrument that made the original property separate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template makes this rule explicit and allows the parties to record an exception where appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eYield and income from separate property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is one of the most important drafting points. Under the Swedish statutory default, \u003cstrong\u003eyield from separate property is marital property\u003c\/strong\u003e unless the relevant legal instrument provides otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can include dividends, interest, rental income and other recurring returns. The template therefore requires the parties to make an express choice on whether yield should also be separate property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFuture property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Marriage Code permits a prenuptial agreement to cover property that a spouse already owns as well as property that later accrues to that spouse. The template includes options for current and future property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOwnership and liabilities are not automatically transferred\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA prenuptial agreement does not transfer legal ownership of a house, company, securities or bank account between the spouses. Nor does it make one spouse responsible for the other's liabilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf ownership is to change, a separate legally appropriate transfer – for example a purchase or gift – may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA prenuptial agreement does not determine inheritance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement affects the classification of property for division of property. It does not decide who inherits after a spouse dies. Inheritance planning can therefore require a separate will.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration with the Swedish Tax Agency\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRegistration is required for the agreement to obtain the legal effect prescribed by the Swedish Marriage Code.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe signed original is sent to \u003cstrong\u003eSkatteverket, Äktenskapsregistret, 871 87 Härnösand, Sweden\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBoth parties should sign and date the document.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish personal identity numbers should be stated where available so the parties can be identified.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency's current application fee on 7 October 2026 is \u003cstrong\u003eSEK 275 per registration matter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAfter registration, the Tax Agency returns the original and retains an electronic copy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does a premarital agreement take effect?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf an agreement executed before the wedding is submitted for registration \u003cstrong\u003eno later than one month after the marriage date\u003c\/strong\u003e, it takes effect from the date of marriage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf it is submitted later, it does not receive retroactive effect from the wedding date. After the marriage has taken place, the rules applicable to spouses govern the effective date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration is not substantive legal approval\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency checks the formal conditions for registration. Registration does not mean that the authority has decided that the wording is fair, materially valid or will necessarily produce every legal consequence the parties expect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAvoid time limits and conditional clauses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish Tax Agency guidance states that a prenuptial agreement cannot simply be structured as a private contract that expires after a set number of years or depends on uncertain future conditions. If the spouses later want to change the property regime, they should execute and register a new prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLater changes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA new registered prenuptial agreement can, for example, convert property that was previously made separate property back into marital property. The new document must satisfy the applicable form and registration requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUnreasonable terms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 12 section 3 of the Swedish Marriage Code, a term in a prenuptial agreement can in certain circumstances be adjusted or disregarded on division of property if it would be unreasonable having regard to the content, circumstances at formation, later developments and the circumstances overall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA registered agreement should therefore not be presented as an absolute guarantee of a particular future financial result.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCross-border situations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eForeign nationality, residence outside Sweden, property in another country or a planned international move can raise additional choice-of-law and form questions under EU Regulation 2016\/1103 and Swedish private international law. Individual legal advice is recommended in such cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary template in this product. A full Swedish reference version is included separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/strong\u003e English terminology is used to make the documents easier to work with internationally, but the governing legal framework is Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/aktenskapsforord-mall-fore-aktenskap-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Äktenskapsförord före äktenskap – Word\/PDF + English + guide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 9 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo we need witnesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Witnesses are not part of the statutory Swedish form requirements for a prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the agreement be registered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A Swedish prenuptial agreement must be registered with the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan future property be made separate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The agreement can cover property already owned and property that later accrues to a spouse, provided the drafting is sufficiently clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre dividends from separate shares automatically separate property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Under the statutory default, yield from separate property is marital property unless otherwise provided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agreement say that it expires after five years?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat structure should be avoided. Swedish guidance does not treat a prenuptial agreement as an ordinary time-limited private contract. A later change should instead be made through a new registered agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes registration guarantee that the agreement will work exactly as intended?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Registration is not a complete substantive review of fairness, interpretation or future legal effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid governed by Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48203485348182,"sku":"7350139912891","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/prenuptial-agreement-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791325234"},{"product_id":"aktenskapsforord-sarskilt-angiven-egendom-word-pdf","title":"Prenuptial agreement – specifically designated property | Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial agreement for specified property under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for spouses or prospective spouses who wish to designate one or more clearly identified assets as separate property, without automatically regulating all other property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 7, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated in accordance with the current Swedish Marriage Code and the Swedish Tax Agency's legal guidance, including the clarifications published on October 1, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish master template for specified property.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains identification, surrogates, yield, registration, and common mistakes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrenuptial Agreement for Specified Separate Property governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide to the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNot a “conditional” prenuptial agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product was labeled “conditional prenuptial agreement.” That term has been removed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency's legal guidance states that prenuptial agreements should not be time-limited or made dependent on future conditions. If the spouses wish to change the property arrangement later, they should instead draft and register a new prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is intended for when one or more \u003cstrong\u003especific assets\u003c\/strong\u003e are to be separate property, while other property is left outside of this specific regulation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExamples can be:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific property with a specified property designation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific tenant-owner apartment (bostadsrätt),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eall or a specific share of stocks in a specified company,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific securities account or other account,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother property that can be identified with sufficient precision.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy exact identification is important\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePhrasings such as “my company,” “my shares,” or “my home” can become ambiguous if multiple assets fit the description. The new template therefore contains a specific asset table with space for legal or practical identification, owner, choice regarding yield, and appendix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf only a certain share is to be separate, the share should be explicitly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSurrogates – assets that replace the property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 7, Section 2 of the Marriage Code, whatever replaces separate property is, as a general rule, also separate property, unless otherwise stipulated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore includes a specific option for substitute property and the possibility to specify exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eYield – a separate choice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the general rule of the law, the yield from separate property is \u003cstrong\u003ematrimonial property\u003c\/strong\u003e, unless otherwise stipulated in the legal instrument that made the property separate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can, for example, apply to dividends from shares, interest, or rental income. The template therefore requires an active choice if the yield is also to be separate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe prenuptial agreement does not change ownership\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaking an asset separate property does not mean that ownership is transferred between the spouses. If ownership is also to be changed, a separate transfer document is required, such as a deed of gift or purchase agreement, and certain assets may be subject to additional formal requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOther property is not automatically affected\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis document only regulates the property that is actually specified. It does not mean that all other property is automatically matrimonial property. Property can be separate on other grounds, for example through a gift or a will with conditions regarding separate property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration with the Swedish Tax Agency\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA prenuptial agreement must be in writing, dated, signed by both spouses or prospective spouses, and registered with the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWitnesses are not a statutory formal requirement.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor prospective spouses, the prenuptial agreement is valid from the date of marriage if it is submitted for registration no later than one month after the wedding. For already married spouses, it is valid from the day the document is received by the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency’s registration is not a material approval\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency verifies whether the formal requirements for registration are met. Registration does not mean that the authority has determined the material legal effect of the agreement or whether the phrasings are optimal for a future division of property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA prenuptial agreement does not determine who inherits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe prenuptial agreement affects the classification of property for a future division of property but does not determine the order of inheritance. If the parties also wish to control who inherits, a separate will may be needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInternational connection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf any of the parties has foreign citizenship or residence, property abroad, or is planning to move across a national border, EU rules on the property regime of international couples and Swedish private international law may become relevant. Individual legal advice is recommended in such cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package contains a complete \u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement for Specified Separate Property\u003c\/strong\u003e in English. The English version is a reference version and is explicitly governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/prenuptial-agreement-specified-separate-property-swedish-law\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you like the English version as the primary product? See Prenuptial Agreement for Specified Separate Property – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish master version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust all my property be made separate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A prenuptial agreement can cover only a portion of the spouses' property or only one spouse's property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I make only the shares in my company separate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the asset is specified clearly enough. For example, specify company name, registration number, and which share or which stocks are intended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the dividend from separate shares automatically become separate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. According to the general rule of the law, yield is matrimonial property unless otherwise stipulated. The template therefore includes an explicit choice for yield.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the prenuptial agreement be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Witnesses are not a statutory formal requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agreement only apply in the event of divorce or for five years?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat type of condition or time limit should not be used. Instead, change the property arrangement later through a new registered prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes registration guarantee that the agreement has the exact intended effect?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Tax Agency's registration is not a full material review of the legal effect of the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48203586666838,"sku":"7350139912907","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/aktenskapsforord-sarskilt-angiven-egendom-hero-2027.png?v=1791326650"},{"product_id":"prenuptial-agreement-specified-separate-property-swedish-law","title":"Prenuptial Agreement – Specified Separate Property | Swedish Law | Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement for Specified Separate Property governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first 2026\/2027 package for spouses or prospective spouses who want one or more precisely identified assets to be separate property without automatically regulating all other property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 7 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated against the current Swedish Marriage Code and the Swedish Tax Agency's legal guidance, including the clarification published on 1 October 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template for specified separate property.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrenuptial Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains asset identification, substitute property, yield, registration and common drafting issues.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference agreement – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for registration and comparison.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNot a “conditional prenuptial agreement”\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product was described as a conditional prenuptial agreement. That terminology has been removed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish Tax Agency guidance states that a prenuptial agreement should not be made time-limited or dependent on a future condition in the way ordinary private contracts sometimes are. If spouses later want to change the property regime, they should execute and register a new prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis package is intended where one or more \u003cstrong\u003especific identifiable assets\u003c\/strong\u003e should become separate property while other property is left outside this particular designation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExamples include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific property identified by official property designation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specified condominium,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eall or a stated proportion of shares in a named company,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea particular securities account or portfolio, or\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eanother asset that can be identified with sufficient precision.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePrecise asset identification\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWording such as “my company”, “my shares” or “my home” may be ambiguous if several assets could match. The template therefore contains a dedicated asset table for legal or practical identifiers, current owner, treatment of yield and any attached schedule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf only part of an asset is to be separate property, the proportion should be stated expressly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitute property\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 7 section 2 of the Swedish Marriage Code, property replacing separate property is generally also separate property unless otherwise provided by the legal instrument that made the original property separate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement therefore includes an explicit substitute-property option and space for any intended exception.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eYield is a separate drafting choice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the statutory default, \u003cstrong\u003eyield from separate property is marital property\u003c\/strong\u003e unless the relevant legal instrument provides otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can include dividends, interest, rental income and other returns. The template therefore requires an express choice regarding yield instead of assuming that it automatically follows the underlying asset.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe agreement does not transfer ownership\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMaking an asset separate property does not transfer legal title between the spouses. If ownership is also intended to change, a separate transfer instrument may be required, and certain assets can be subject to additional statutory form requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOther property is not automatically classified\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement only regulates the property actually identified in it. This does not mean that all other property is necessarily marital property; an asset may already be separate property because of a gift, will or another legally recognised basis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration with the Swedish Tax Agency\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA Swedish prenuptial agreement must be in writing, dated, personally signed by both spouses or prospective spouses and registered with the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWitnesses are not a statutory requirement.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor prospective spouses, the agreement takes effect from the marriage date if submitted for registration no later than one month after the wedding. For already married spouses, it takes effect from the date on which it is received by the Swedish Tax Agency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRegistration is not substantive approval\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency examines whether the formal requirements for registration are satisfied. Registration does not mean that the authority has determined the final substantive legal effect, fairness or interpretation of the wording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInheritance and liabilities\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis agreement does not determine who inherits after a spouse dies and does not transfer liabilities between the spouses. A separate will, transfer agreement or other document may be needed depending on the intended result.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCross-border situations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eForeign nationality, residence outside Sweden, property abroad or an intended international move can raise additional questions under EU Regulation 2016\/1103 and Swedish private international law. Individual legal advice is recommended in such cases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English agreement is the primary version in this product. A full Swedish reference version and Swedish reference guide are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/strong\u003e The English wording is provided for usability, while the legal framework is Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/aktenskapsforord-sarskilt-angiven-egendom-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Äktenskapsförord – särskilt angiven egendom →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan only one specific asset be made separate property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Swedish law permits a prenuptial agreement to cover only part of the spouses' property or only one spouse's property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan shares in a specific company be made separate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the asset is identified clearly enough. Company name, registration number and the shares or proportion concerned should be stated where appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre dividends from separate shares automatically separate property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Under the statutory default, yield is marital property unless otherwise provided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre witnesses required?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Witnesses are not part of the statutory Swedish form requirements for a prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agreement apply only on divorce or expire after five years?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat structure should not be used. Later changes should instead be made through a new written, signed and registered prenuptial agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes registration guarantee the intended legal result?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Registration is a formal registration process and not a complete substantive legal review of the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid governed by Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48203627299158,"sku":"7350139912914","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/prenuptial-agreement-specified-property-hero-2027.png?v=1791327347"}],"url":"https:\/\/mallbutiken.se\/en\/collections\/dokumentmallar.oembed?page=20","provider":"Mallbutiken","version":"1.0","type":"link"}